Your Federal Quarterly Tax Payments are due April 15th Get Help Now >>

Opel Corsa D Owners Manual by DanMarius1

VIEWS: 1,281 PAGES: 269

									VAUXHALL Corsa & Combo




           Owner’s Manual
Data specific to your ve hicle
Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it ea sily accessible.
This information is available under the section "Technical da ta " as well as on the identification plate.

Fuel
                Desi gnation



Engine oil
                Grad e

                Viscosity



Tyre inflation pressure
                                      Tyre si ze                         wi th up to 3 persons                   wi th full load
                Sum mer tyres                                  Front               R ear                 Front             R ea r


                Winter tyres                                   Front               R ear                 Front             R ea r


Weights
Permissible gross vehicle weig ht


–               EC k erb weight

=               Loading




0
Your Corsa
Dev eloped to the la test findings of vehic le research, it offers technical sophistication and exceptiona l comfort.
Your vehicle represents an ideal synthesis of ad vanced technolog y, outsta nding safety, environm ental compatibility and economy in
opera tion.
It now lies with you to drive your vehicle safely and to see it performs perfectly.
This O wner's Manual provides you with all the necessary information to tha t end.
The O wner's Manual should a lways be kept in the v ehicle: ready to hand in the g lov e com partment.

Make use of the Owne r's Manual:
z   Its “I n brief” section will giv e y ou an initial ov erview.
z   Its index will help you find what y ou want.
z   It will familiarize you with the sophisticated technology.
z   It will increase your pleasure in y our vehicle.
z   It will help you to handle y our v ehicle ex pertly.
The O wner's Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood.
This symb ol:
6 signifies: continue reading on next page.
3 The asterisk sig nifies equipment op tions not in all vehicles (model variants, engine options, models specific to one country, op tional
  equipment, Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories).


 Text highlighted in yellow in p artic ular indica tes possible risk of accident and
 injury. Disregard of these notes can lead to injuries which may b e fatal. Vehicle
 passengers must b e informed accordingly.


Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or ind icate some action to be performed.
Black arrow s in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second ac tion to be perform ed.




We w ish you m any hours of pleasurable driving
Your Va uxhall team


                                                                                                                                              1
2
Contents   Comm itment to custom er
           satisfaction:
                                                          In b rief . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 4
                                                          Instrum ents ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 29
           Our ai m: to k eep you happy with your         K eys, doors, b onnet .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 50
           vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers     S eats, interior ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 64
           offer first class service at competitive       S afety system s ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 78
           prices. Experienced, factory-trained           Lighting ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 99
           technicians w ork according to factory         Windows,
           instructions.Your Authorised Repairer can
                                                              sun roof,
           supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALL-
                                                              folding sun roof . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 103
           APPRO VED PARTS , which hav e und ergone
           stringent quality and precision chec ks, and   C lim ate c ontrol .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 112
           of course useful and a ttrac tiv e             Easy tronic . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 126
           VAUXHALL-APPROVED AC CESSO RIES.               Automatic transm ission . .... ..... .... ..... .... 132
           Our nam e i s your guara ntee!                 Driving hints . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 138
           For d eta ils of the                           S aving fuel,
           Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork            protecting the environment ... ..... .... 140
           please r ing this number; 01582 - 427200       Fuel consum ption,
                                                              fuel, refuelling ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 142
                                                          C atalytic converter, exhaust gases .... 145
                                                          Drive control system s .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 150
                                                          Brakes ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 156
                                                          Wheels, tyres . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 160
                                                          Roof racks,
                                                              caravan and tra iler towing .... ..... .... 165
                                                          S elf-help .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 175
                                                          If y ou ha ve a problem ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 214
                                                          Maintenance,
                                                              inspection system . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 216
                                                          Vehicle care .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 227
                                                          Technical data . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 232
                                                          Index . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 260




                                                                                                                                       3
In brief




           Key num be rs,                                 To unlock and ope n vehicle :
           code numbe rs                                  P ress button q 3,
           Remove key number from keys.                   lift door handle
                                                          To unlock using the key in the driver’s door
           The key number is specified in the vehic le
                                                          lock: Turn k ey tow ards front of vehic le, lift
           docum ents and in the C ar Pass 3.
                                                          door handle.
           Alloy wheels 3, tow ing equip ment 3 : M ake
                                                          Locking from the inside: Press lock buttons.
           a note of the key identifier cod es.
                                                          6 Door lock s, child safety locks 3 –
           Elec tronic imm obiliser, infotainment
                                                          pag e 50,
           sy stem 3: The code numb ers are specified
                                                          electronic immobiliser – page 51,
           in the Ca r Pass.
                                                          radio remote control 3 – page 52,
           Do not k eep the Car Pass in the vehic le.     central loc king sy stem 3 – pag e 54,
           6 Further information – pages 50, 51,          Vauxhall alarm system 3 – page 60.
           vehicle recomm issioning – page 226.




4
To unlock and open luggage                          To adjust front s eat 3:                           To adjust front seat backrests:
compartme nt:                                       Pull handle,                                       Turn handwheel
Turn key clockwis e in button                       slide seat,                                        Move seat bac krest to suit sea ting position.
as far as it will go or                             release handle,
pre ss button q 3 on remote control,                allow se at to audibly latch into                  Do not lea n on seat back rest whilst
                                                                                                       adjusting it.
pre ss button                                       position
If the key is used, the doors are not               Nev er adjust the seat whilst driving . It could   6 Sea t position – see pa ge 64.
unlock ed. To avoid being locked out, the           move in a n uncontrolled manner when the
key ca nnot be rem ov ed.                           ha ndle has been pulled.
If the remote control is used, the luggage          6 Seat position – see page 64.
compartment is only unlock ed if the key
slot in the button is in the horizontal              Im porta nt : Do not sit nearer than 10
position. If it is in the vertic al position, the    inches (25c m) from the steering wheel, to
luggage compartment is always locked.                permit safe airbag dep loy ment.
6 Ra dio remote control 3 – see pag e 52,
central lock ing 3 – see p age 54,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 60.




                                                                                                                                                    5
To adjust front seat height 3:                   To fold front se at backres t 3:
Pull le ver at s ide                             Raise lever
Lift lever a nd relieve som e weight from seat   To enter a nd leav e the rear sea t area, tilt
to raise it or press down on seat with body      front seat back forwards.
weight to low er it.                             6 Seat position – see page 64.
Never adjust the driver’s seat whilst driving.
It could m ov e in a n uncontrolled m anner
when the lev er has been pulled .
6 S eat position – see pag e 64.




6
Adjusting head restraint he ight:              To adjust interior mirror:
Tilt forwards to release,                      Swivel mirror housing
hold firmly and adjust height,                 Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing
then rele as e                                 to reduce dazzle at night.
6 H ead restra int p osition – see page 64,    6 Automatic anti-dazz le interior m irror 3 –
further information, removal – see p age 65,   see p age 98.
rea r head restraints 3 – see page 65.




                                                                                               7
Adjusting e xte rior mirrors :                  Electrically adjustable exterior
From inside, swivel lever in require d          mirrors 3:
direction                                       Four-way switch in drive r’s door
6 Further informa tion, aspheric al ex terior   Togg le switch to left or right: Four-way
mirror 3 – see page 97.                         switch m ov es appropriate mirror.
                                                6 Additional instructions, a spheric al
                                                exterior mirror 3 – p age 97,
                                                heated ex terior mirror 3 – page 19.




8
Fitting seat belt:                            Disengaging steering column lock:      Steering whee l adjustment 3:
Draw se at be lt smoothly from                To re lease the lock,                  Swive l lever down,
inertia ree l,                                move the s te ering wheel slightly     adjust he ight,
guide over shoulder                           and turn the key to position I         swivel leve r up,
and engage in buckle                          Positions:                             engage
The b elt must not be twisted at any point.   o = Ignition off                       Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is
The lap belt must lie snugly against the      I = Steering released, ig nition off   stationary and steering colum n loc k is
body. The backrest must not be tilted bac k   II = Ignition on,                      released.
too far (recomm ended tilting angle                 diesel engine: Preheating        6 Airbag sy stems – pa ge 84.
approx. 25°).                                 III = Start
To release belt, press red button on belt     6 Starting – page 22,
buckle.                                       electronic im mobiliser – pa ge 51,
                                              remove key and loc k steering w heel
6 S afety belts – see pa ges 79 to 83,
                                              – page 23.
airbag sy stems 3 – see p age 84,
seat p osition – see page 64.




                                                                                                                              9
10
                                                           Page                                                                          Pa ge                                                         Page
1   Side air v ents ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 115            10   Instruments . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 29   20 Heated seats 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 115
2   Front pa ssenger airbag 3 .... ..... .... . 84                          11   Windscreen wiper,                                                21 Accessory socket or
                                                                                 wind screen wash system,                                            cigarette lighter . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 75
3   Infotainm ent system 3 . .... .... ..... .... . 48
                                                                                 headlight wash system 3 and                                      22 Ashtray 3 .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 76
4   Haza rd warning lights .. .... .... ..... .... . 17                          rear window w ash system 3 .... ..... .. 17
    LED for                                                                                                                                       23 Air conditioning system 3 ... ..... .... 114
                                                                            12   Light switch ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 15, 99
    Vauxhall alarm system 3 .. .... ..... .... .. 60                                                                                                 Heated rear w indow 3 .... .... .... 19, 114
                                                                            13   Head lig ht range adjustment 3 ..... 100                            Air recirc ulation system 3 .... ..... .... 114
5   Display 3 for tim e, date,
                                                                                 Fog tail lig ht .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 100
    outside tem perature,                                                                                                                         24 Heating and v entilation
                                                                                 Fog lights 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 100
    infotainment sy stem 3 . .... .... ..... .... . 37                                                                                               system .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 112
                                                                                 Instrument illumination ... ..... .... ..... 101                    C lim ate c ontrol system 3 .... ..... .... . 119
6   Centre air v ents .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 115
                                                                            14   Bonnet release lev er . .... .... ..... .... ..... . 63          25 Glove compartment ... ..... .... ..... .... .. 77
7   Turn signal lights, hea dlight fla sh,
                                                                            15   Starter switch
    dipped and main beam ... .... ..... .... . 15
                                                                                 with steering wheel lock .. ..... .... ..... ... 9
    Door-to-door light
    func tion 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 101          16   Steering wheel adjustm ent 3 ... ..... ... 9
    Cruise control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 153               17   Ac celera tor pedal .... .... .... ..... 138, 139
8   Horn .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 17   18   Brake peda l ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 138, 157
9   Infotainm ent system                                                    19   Clutch ped al 3 .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 139
    rem ote control 3 .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 26




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 11
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 11
Control indicators                   I   O il pressur e:                 R     Brake system,
X     Sea t belt 3:                      see page 30.                          clutch syst em :
      see p age 29.                                                            see page 32.
                                     O   Turn signal l ights:
>     Fog l ights 3:                     see pages 16, 31.               u     Anti-lock brak e system:
      see p ages 29, 100.                                                      see page 158.
                                     C   Mai n beam:
A     Engine electronics,                see pages 15, 31.               S     Engine oil lev el 3:
      immob iliser 3,                                                          see pages 32, 218.
      automat ic tra nsm ission 3,   !   Glow plugs 3:
      Easyt ronic 3,                     see page 31.                    EPS   Electr oni c power steering 3:
      fault:                                                                   see page 32.
      see p ages 29, 51, 148.        1   Autom atic t ransmission 3,
                                         sporty driv ing pr og ramm e:   v     Traction C ontrol system 3,
Z     Exhaust em issi on 3:              see page 134.                         Electr oni c Sta bility Program 3:
      see p ages 30, 51, 147.                                                  see page 150.
                                     T   Autom atic t ransmission 3,
v     Airbag systems 3,                  Easytronic 3,                   g     Trailer turn signa l 3:
      bel t tensioners:                  Winter prog ramm e:                   see page 32.
      see p ages 80, 89.                 see pages 128, 134.
                                                                         Y     Fuel level:
                                     r   Fog tai l light:                      see pages 32, 36, 175.
                                         see pages 31, 100.
                                                                         y     Seat occup ancy recog nition 3:
                                     p   Alt ernat or:                         see pages 89, 90.
                                         see page 31.




12
Lighting                               Clim ate control                    Ü     Hea ted rear wi ndow 3 :
     Lig ht switch,                    x     Air flow:                           see pages 114, 121.
     st alk p osi tions:                     see pages 113, 122.
     see p ages 15, 99,                                                    n     Air condi tioning system 3:
                                             Air distribut ion:                  see page 114.
7    Lig ht s off,
                                             see pages 113, 122,
8    Pa rking l ights,                                                     4     Air recircul ation system 3:
                                       V     To windscreen and                   see page 114.
9    Di pped beam , mai n beam.              front door wind ow s,

0    Courtesy lig ht:                  J     To windscreen,                AUTO Automa tic mod e 3:
                                             front door wind ow s               see page 120.
     see p age 101.
                                             and footwell,
                                                                           ECO   AC com pressor
C    Di pped beam , mai n beam:        K     To footwell,                        activ ation/deact ivat ion 3:
     see p age 15.
                                       L     To hea d area and footwell,         see page 122.
O    Turn sig na l light s:            M     To hea d area .               ß     Hea ted sea ts 3:
     see p age 16.                                                               see page 115.
>    Fog l ights 3:
     see p age 100.

r    Fog t ail lig ht:
     see p age 100.

k    Instrument illum ination:
     see p age 101.

?    Hea dlight range adjustm ent 3:
     see p age 100.

¨    Haza rd wa rning lig ht s:
     see p age 17.




                                                                                                                 13
Sun roof 3                        Date, time, information display,         Misce llaneous
l     Sun roof
                                  infotainment system                      p    Central l ocking system 3:
                                       Inform ation d isp lay 3:                loc king – see pag e 54.
      op ening/lowering:
                                       see page 37.
      see p age 106.
                                  Ö    O n button for date
                                                                           q    Central l ocking system 3:
                                                                                unlocking – see page 54.
\     Sun roof                         and time,
      closing/raising:
      see p age 106.
                                  ;    Setting buttons for date and time   j    Horn,
                                                                                see page 17.
                                       Infot ainment system
Folding sun roof 3                     remote contr ol 3:                  T    Wi nter program ,
\     Foldi ng sun roof                see page 26.                             automa tic tr ansm issi on 3,
      op ening:                                                                 Easytronic 3 :
      see p ages 107, 109.                                                      see pages 128, 134.
                                  Cruise control 3
                                       Buttons on turn sig na l stalk :    +
l     Foldi ng sun roof
                                       see page 153.
                                                                                Fir st- aid k it (cushion) 3 :
      closing:                                                                  see page 180.
      see p ages 107, 109.        I    Activate, store, a ccelerate,
                                                                           ¨    Wa rning tri angle 3:
                                  R    Resume stored speed,                     see page 180.
Winds creen wipe r                     decelerate,
      Stalk positions:            §    Deactivate.
      see p age 17,
§     Off,
$     Ti med interva l wip e or
      automat ic wi pe
      with ra in sensor 3,
%     Slow,
&     Fast.




14
Light switch:                                   Main and dipped be am switch:                 Headlight flash:
7 =     Off                                     Main be am    = Push stalk forward            P ull stalk towards s tee ring wheel
8 =     Parking lights                          Dippe d beam = Push stalk forward
9 =     Dipped or m ain beam                                    again
                                                The blue control indicator C is illuminated
Push 0      =   Courtesy light
                                                when main b eam is on.
Press >     =   Fog lights 3
Push r      =   Fog tail light
6 Further informa tion – see page 99,
head lig ht warning device – see page 24,
head lig ht ra nge adjustment 3 – see
page 100,
door-to-d oor light function – see pa ge 101,
day tim e running lights – see page 99.




                                                                                                                                     15
Operating turn signal lights:                  To ope rate cruise control 3:
Stalk in rest pos ition                        Pre ss buttons on stalk
Right = Up                                     Switch on: Tap button I .
Left     = Down
                                               Switch off: Briefly press button § .
When the steering wheel is turned back, the
stalk automatically returns to its origina l   Resume at stored speed: Tap button R .
position. This will not hap pen when making    6 C ruise c ontrol 3 – see page 153.
a m inor steering manoeuvre such as
changing lane.
When lane chang ing, move sta lk to
resista nce point. When released , the stalk
will spring back.




16
Hazard warning lights:                              Horn operation:                              Windscreen wiper:
On   = Pre ss ¨                                     Pre ss j                                     Stalk up
Off = Pre ss ¨ again                                6 Airbag systems 3 – pa ge 84,               § = Off
To aid location of the pushbutton, the red          Remote control for infotainment system 3 –   $ = Adjus table inte rval
surface is illum ina ted when the ignition          see p age 26.                                % = Slow
switched on. When the button is p ressed,                                                        & = Fast
its c ontrol ind ic ator flashes in time with the                                                S etting wiper interval to a value between
hazard warning lig hts.                                                                          2 and 15 seconds:
                                                                                                    Stalk to interv al switching $,
                                                                                                    stalk to §,
                                                                                                    wait for desired interval,
                                                                                                    stalk back to interval switching $.
                                                                                                 The interval remains stored until the next
                                                                                                 change or until the ig nition is switched off.
                                                                                                 S witc hing the ignition off and m oving the
                                                                                                 stalk to $ sets the interv al to 7 seconds.




                                                                                                                                             17
Autom atic w iper with rain se nsor 3:      Operating windscree n and                       Ope rating rear window wiper and
Move stalk up                               headlight wash systems 3:                       wash sys tem s 3:
§ = Off                                     Pull stalk towards steering whee l              Wiper on      = Push stalk forward
$ = Automatic wiper                         The wiper will swipe for a few strokes.         Wiper off     = Pull stalk towards
      with rain se nsor                                                                                       steering whee l
                                            The head lig ht wash system 3 ca n be
% = Slow (constant)                                                                         Wash          = Push stalk forward
                                            op erated when the lights are on.
& = Fast (constant)                                                                                           and hold
Autom atic wiping $ : The rain sensor       On vehicles fitted w ith ra in sensor 3, keep   The rear window w iper swipes in timed
detects the a mount of wa ter on the        the sensor area c lean.                         interva l mode.
windscreen and automatically regulates      6 Further information – see                     The wip er will swip e for a few strok es when
the w indscreen wiper.                      pages 224, 230.                                 washing.
Push stalk down to switch off.                                                              6 Further inform ation – see
If necessary, the positions % or & can be                                                   pag es 224, 230.
selected m anually .




18
Heate d re ar window 3,                         Clearing misted or icy window s:                  To s et autom atic m ode of
heated exterior mirrors 3:                      Turn rotary s witches for te mperature            climate control system 3:
On   = Pre ss Ü                                 and air flow clockwis e,                          P ress AUTO button,
Off = Pre ss Ü again                            set air distribution to V,                        se t tem pe rature using rotary knob
Rear window and exterior m irror heating        press air conditioning switch n 3                 O pen a ll air vents.
with ignition sw itched on. Control indicator   Close centre air vents; p ush sliders inw ards.   6 Automa tic climate control system 3 – see
in switch.                                      Direct side air vents towards d oor windows.      pag e 119.
6 Further inform ation – see                    6 Clim ate control – see pa ge 112,
pages 114, 121.                                 air conditioning system 3 – see pa ge 114,
                                                autom atic climate control system 3 – see
                                                page 119.




                                                                                                                                           19
Inform ation display 3:                Manual trans miss ion:                            Easytronic 3:
Prese nts inform ation                 Reverse gear: With vehicle stationary ,           N     = Neutral/start position
–   Tim e,                             pull the ring up three seconds after d e-         o     = Centre pos ition
–   Outside temperature,               clutching and engage gear.                                 (driving position)
–   Radio 3 or da te,                                                                    +     = Higher gear
                                       If the gear d oes not engage, set the lev er in
–   Navigation 3,                                                                        -     = Low er ge ar
                                       neutra l, release the clutc h pedal and           A/M = Sw itch between
–   Telephone 3,                       depress again; then repeat gear selection.                 automatic and
–   Trip computer 3 .
                                                                                                  manual mode
6 Information Display – see page 37.                                                     R     = Re verse
                                                                                                  (with sele ctor lever lock)
                                                                                         To mov e the selector lever from N to R
                                                                                         press the button on the lever.
                                                                                         O nly start in N with foot brake applied.
                                                                                         6 Further inform ation – page 126.




20
                                                 To enga ge P, R, 3 or 1, pull ha nd le beneath
                                                 selector lever.
                                                 P:   Only w ith v ehicle stationary, first
                                                      apply hand brake
                                                 R:   Only w ith v ehicle stationary
                                                 6 Autom atic transmission – see page 132.




Autom atic transmission 3:                                                                        Exhaust gases are poisonous
P    = Park                                                                                       Exhaust g ases contain ca rbon monox ide,
R    = Reve rse                                                                                   which is ex tremely poisonous but is
N    = Neutral                                                                                    odourless and colourless.
D    = Automatic gear selection
3    = 1st to 3 rd gear                                                                           Therefore never inhale exhaust gases, and
2    = 1st and 2 nd gear                                                                          nev er run the engine in an enclosed space.
1    = 1st gear                                                                                   Avoid d riv ing with an open lugga ge
S    = Sporty driving programme                                                                   compa rtm ent. O therwise, exhaust gases
Start is only possib le in P or N . To leave P                                                    could penetrate the interior.
switch ignition on, ap ply foot brake and
pull handle benea th selector lever.




                                                                                                                                             21
Before starting off, check:
z Ty re pressure and tyre cond ition – see
  pages 162, 249.
z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine
  com partment – see pages 217 to 224.
z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting
  and num ber p la tes are free from dirt,
  snow and ice and op erational.
z Do not p la ce a ny objects in front of the
  rear window, on the instrum ent panel or
  in the area in which the airbag s inflate.
z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are
  correctly ad justed.
z Check brakes.
                                                Starting, petrol engine:                         Starting, dies el engine:
                                                Manual trans miss ion in neutral                 Manual transmission in neutral
                                                with clutch depressed,                           with clutch depres sed,
                                                press foot brake , Easytronic 3 in N,            pre ss foot brake,
                                                automatic trans miss ion 3 in P or N,            automatic transmission 3 in P or N,
                                                do not acce lerate,                              do not accelerate,
                                                turn key to III                                  turn ke y to II;
                                                The initially increased engine speed             after pre heating control indicator
                                                autom atic ally falls as the engine              goes out1) ,
                                                temperature rises.                               turn ke y to III
                                                                                                 Before rep eating the starting procedure,
                                                Before repea ting the starting proc edure,
                                                                                                 turn the key b ack to o in the starter switch,
                                                turn the key back to o in the sta rter switch,
                                                                                                 remove it and then reinsert it. Then repeat
                                                remove it and then reinsert it. Then repeat
                                                                                                 the starting procedure.
                                                the starting proc edure.
                                                                                                 6 Electronic imm obiliser – pa ge 51,
                                                6 Electronic immobiliser – page 51,
                                                                                                 further inform ation – pages 138, 139, 175.
                                                further information – pa ges 138, 139, 175.



                                                                                                 1)
                                                                                                      Preh eatin g system sw itches on o nly if outside
                                                                                                      tem perature is low .


22
                                                Warning buz zers while driving
                                                z if seat b elt is not fastened 3,
                                                z if a specified m aximum speed is
                                                  exceeded 3.

                                                Warning buz zers when parking
                                                the vehicle and opening the driver’s
                                                door
                                                z when the ignition key is in the starter
                                                  switch,
                                                z if parking lig hts/dip ped beam are on,
                                                z if the turn signal sta lk is engaged.


Rele as ing the hand brake :                                                                P arking the ve hicle:
Raise leve r s lightly,                                                                     Apply handbrake firmly,
pre ss lock button,                                                                         engine off,
lower le ver fully                                                                          remove key,
And now "H ave a good journey! "                                                            lock steering whe el,
                                                                                            lock doors
Drive carefully, economically and with the
                                                                                            To lock, press button p or turn key in lock
env ironment in m ind. While driving , do not
                                                                                            towards rea r of vehicle. To activa te anti-
do any thing that could distract y ou.
                                                                                            theft locking sy stem 3 and Vauxhall alarm
                                                                                            system 3, press button p twice.
                                                                                            6 Further inform ation – see pages 51, 138,
                                                                                            radio remote control 3 – see page 52,
                                                                                            central loc king sy stem 3 – see page 54,
                                                                                            Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 60,
                                                                                            vehicle d ecommissioning – see page 226.




                                                                                                                                      23
Advice when parking:                           z In v ehicles with automatic
z Alwa ys apply ha nd brake firm ly. O n         transm ission 3 the k ey can only be
  slopes apply the hand b rake as firmly as      rem oved when the selector lever is in
  possible.                                      position P.
z With manual transmission, eng age first      z Turn steering wheel until lock is felt to
  gear or reverse gea r. With Easytronic 3,      eng age (anti-theft protection).
  place selector lever in centre position      z Engine cooling fan may run on after the
  before switching off ignition. With            eng ine has been switc hed off.
  automa tic transm ission 3, place selector
                                               z Do not park vehicle on easily ignitable
  lever in P.
                                                 surfaces as the hot exhaust system
z Close window, sun roof 3 and fold ing sun      temperatures could cause the surface to
  roof 3 .                                       ignite.
z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 the control    6 Further information – see
  indica tor R flashes for a few seconds       pages 224, 226.
  after the ig nition is switched off if the                                                 Service work,
  hand brake has not been a pplied.                                                          maintenance
                                                                                             We rec om mend that y ou entrust all work to
                                                                                             y our Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who
                                                                                             can p rov id e y ou with reliable service and
                                                                                             correc tly perform a ll work according to
                                                                                             factory instructions.
                                                                                             6 Vauxhall S ervice – page 214,
                                                                                             service interva l disp la y – page 216.




24
Genuine V auxhall Parts and                          "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories"      That was a brief look
Acces sories                                         and conversion parts approved by              at the mos t important
We recommend that you use " Genuine                  Vauxhall c an be ob tained from y our         inform ation for your firs t drive in
Vauxhall Parts a nd Accessories" and                 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, of c ourse.     your Corsa/Combo.
conversion parts released expressly for              Here you will also be giv en comprehensiv e
your vehicle ty pe. These parts have                 advice about permitted technical changes
undergone special tests to establish their           and correct installation w ill take place.
reliab ility , safety and specific suitability for                                                 The othe r pages
Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous                 For your s afety                             of this chapter
market monitoring, we cannot assess or                C arry out regularly the check s             contain a description of some
guarantee these attributes for other                  rec om mended in the indiv idual sections    intere sting functions
products, ev en if they have been granted             of this Owner’ s M anual.                    in your vehicle .
approva l by the relevant authorities or in           Ensure that y our v ehicle is serv iced as
som e other form.                                     specified in the S ervice Booklet. We
                                                      rec om mend that you consult your
                                                      Vauxhall Authorised R epairer.               The rem aining chapters
                                                                                                   of the Owner’s Manual
                                                      Hav e faults remedied without d elay!        contain important information
                                                      C onsult a workshop. We recommend            on operation, safety
                                                      your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If        and maintenance
                                                      necessary , interrupt your journey.          as well as a complete inde x.
                                                      6 Maintenance – see page 216.




                                                                                                                                           25
Infotainm ent sys tem ope ration              To select using the m ultifunction button:     To select with steering w heel buttons:
Functions are selected and executed in the    Press and turn multifunction button.           S elec t menu options via the menus using
menu on the display using the four-way                                                       the buttons.
                                              To exit a menu, turn the multifunction
button, the m ultifunction b utton 3 on the   button left or rig ht to Ret urn or Main and   For further information, see infota inment
infotainment sy stem or the buttons 3 on      select.                                        system instructions.
the steering wheel. C orresp onding m enu
options are shown on the display.
To select with four-way button:
Press four-way button up, down, right or
left.




26
Trip computer 3                               Vauxhall Full Size airbag system                 Si de airba g system 3
The trip com puter shows vehicle data tha t   The Vauxhall Full S ize a irb ag system          The side airbag sy stem triggers when a
is continually recorded and evaluated         comprises severa l ind ividual systems.          side-on collision occurs and provides a
electronic ally .                                                                              safety barrier for the driver a nd/or
                                              Front a irbag system                             passenger in the respective front door
Functions:                                    The front airbag sy stem will b e triggered in   area. This reduces the risk of injury to the
z Rang e                                      the event of a serious accident inv olv ing a    upper body considera bly in case of a side
z Instantaneous consumption                   frontal impa ct and forms sa fety cushions       impa ct.
z Distance tra velled                         for the driver and front passenger. The
z Av erage speed                              forward movement of the driver a nd front        C ur tain ai rbag syst em 3
z Effective consump tion                      passenger is check ed a nd the risk of           The curtain a irba g system triggers in case
z Av erage consump tion                       injuries to the up per body and head             of a side-on collision and provid es a safety
z Stop watch                                  thereby substantially reduced.                   barrier in the hea d area on the respective
                                                                                               side of the vehic le. This reduces the risk of
                                                                                               injury to the hea d considerab ly in case of a
                                                                                               side-on collision.
                                                                                               6 Further inform ation – page 84.




                                                                                                                                          27
Active he ad res traints 3                      Parking Distance Se nsor 3                       ECOService-Flex
In the event of a rear-end impa ct, the         The parking p ilot a utoma tica lly switches     The oil cha nge and service intervals are
active head restraints automatically tilt       itself on w hen rev ersing.                      flex ible, based on a num ber of different
forward a little. The head is more                                                               param eters and the conditions under
                                                If the vehicle a pproaches an obstacle w hen
effectively supported by the head restraint                                                      which the vehicle is used. Various eng ine-
                                                reversing, a series of signals c an be heard
and the danger of injuries caused by                                                             spec ific d ata is continuously recorded and
                                                in the vehicle interior. The interval betw een
hyperextension in the a rea of the cervic al                                                     used to c alcula te the remaining distance
                                                the signa ls b ecomes shorter as the
vertebrae is reduced.                                                                            until the next service is due.
                                                distance is reduced. If the distanc e is less
Active head restraints are id entified by the   than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous.       To display remaining distance:
lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint          6 Further information – page 155.                z Ignition off,
guide bushes.
                                                                                                 z Press reset knob on instrument panel
                                                                                                   approx. 2 seconds,
                                                                                                 z InsP and the remaining distance a re
                                                                                                   displa yed.




28
Instruments




              Control indicators                               A
              The control indica tors described here are       Engine el ect ronics, transmi ssion
              not p resent in all vehicles. The description    electronics, imm obiliser, d iesel fuel fi lter 3
              applies to all instrum ent versions.             The control indicator illuminates for a few
                                                               seconds when the ignition is switched on.
              X                                                Illuminates when the eng ine is running
              Seat belt 3
                                                               Fault in engine electronics or transm ission
              If the control indicator illuminates after the
                                                               electronics. Electronics switch to em er-
              ignition is switc hed on (with warning
                                                               gency running prog ra mme, fuel consum p-
              buzzer), fasten seat belt – see page 82.
                                                               tion may increase and driveability of the
                                                               vehicle m ay be imp aired – see page 148.
              >
              Fog l ights 3                                    C onsult a workshop immediately . We
                                                               recommend your Vaux hall Authorised
              Control indica tor illuminates when fog
              lig hts are switc hed on.                        Repairer.
                                                               Flashes when the ig nition is on
                                                               Fault in the electronic immobiliser system ;
                                                               the engine c annot be started – see
                                                               pag e 51.




                                                                                                             29
                                                                                                I
                                                                                                O il pressure
                                                                                                The control indicator illuminates when the
                                                                                                ignition is switched on and goes out shortly
                                                                                                after the eng ine starts. Can illuminate
                                                                                                intermittently when idling w ith hot engine;
                                                                                                must go out when engine speed is
                                                                                                increa sed.
                                                                                                Illuminates when the eng ine is running
                                                                                                Eng ine lubrication m ay be interrup ted. This
                                                                                                ma y result in damage to the eng ine and/or
                                                                                                locking of the drive wheels:
                                                                                                1. Depress clutch.
                                                                                                2. Move gear shift lev er to neutral; with
Z                                                                                                  autom atic transmission 3 and
                                                v
Exhaust emission                                                                                   Easytronic 3 m ov e selector lev er to N .
                                                Airbag systems 3,
The c ontrol indicator illumina tes when the    belt tensioners                                 3. Move out of the flow of traffic a s quickly
ignition is switched on and g oes out shortly   see p ages 81, 89.                                 as possible without impeding other
after the engine starts.                                                                           vehicles.
Illuminates when the engine is running          1                                               4. Switching the ignition off (Position I ).
Fault in emission control sy stem. The          Electronic ally controlled d riving
permitted emission limits may be                program mes for automa tic                       When the ignition is off, c onsiderab ly
exceeded. C onsult a workshop . We              transmission 3                                   more force is needed to brak e and steer.
recom mend your Vauxhall Authorised             Control indica tor illuminates when sp orty
                                                driving programme is enabled.                    Do not remove key until vehicle has
Repairer.                                                                                        come to a stand still, otherwise the
If it flashes when the engine is running        Further inform ation – see page 134.             steering column lock c ould engage
Fault that can lead to destruction of                                                            unexpectedly .
the c atalytic converter is indicated –         T
                                                Wi nt er program me for autom atic
see page 147. C onsult a workshop                                                               C onsult a workshop . We recommend your
                                                transmission 3 and Easytronic 3                 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
immediately . We recomm end y our
                                                Control ind icator is illuminated when winter
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                                prog ra m is enabled.
                                                Further inform ation – see pages 128, 134.




30
                                                                                             p
                                                                                             Alt erna tor
                                                                                             The control indicator illuminates when the
                                                                                             ignition is switched on and goes out shortly
                                                                                             after the eng ine starts.
                                                                                             Illuminates when the eng ine is running
                                                                                             S top the vehicle and switch off the engine.
                                                                                             The battery is not being charged. Eng ine
                                                                                             cooling may be interrupted. Contact a
                                                                                             workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
                                                                                             Authorised Repa irer.




O                                             !
Turn signal l ights                           Preheating 3 for diesel eng ines
When the turn signal is activated, the        Control indica tor illuminates during
corresponding control indicator flashes.      prehea ting. Preheating system switches on
Rapid fla sh: A turn signal bulb is faulty.   only if outside temp erature is low.
Both control indicators flash when the
hazard warning lig hts are activated.         r
                                              Fog t ail li ght
Bulb replacem ent – see pa ge 200.            Control indica tor illuminates when fog tail
                                              lig ht is switched on.
C
Mai n bea m
Control indicator illum inates when ma in
beam is on and when headlight flash is
opera ted.




                                                                                                                                       31
                                                                                                      v
                                                                                                      Trac tion Control system (TCP lu s) 3,
                                                                                                      Electronic S tabil ity Prog ram (ES P Pl us ) 3
                                                                                                      see pages 150, 151.

                                                                                                      g
                                                                                                      Trai ler turn signal 3
                                                                                                      When tow ing a trailer or carav an, indicator
                                                                                                      light fla shes at sa me speed as turn signals.
                                                                                                      Does not flash if tra iler or towing vehicle
                                                                                                      turn signal fa ils.

                                                                                                      Y
                                                                                                      Fuel lev el 3
                                                                                                      Illuminated : Low fuel level. Fuel gauge in
                                                                                                      reserve area.
R                                                   u
                                                                                                      Flashing: Fuel supply used up, fill tank
Brak e system ,                                     Anti-lock brak e system                           imm ediately.
clutc h system                                      see p age 158.
The c ontrol indicator illumina tes when the                                                          N ever let the tank run dry!
ignition is switched on if the hand brake           S                                                 Petrol engines: Erratic fuel supp ly can
is applied or if the brake or clutch fluid lev el   Engine oil l ev el 3                              cause cataly tic c onverter to ov erheat – see
is too low . Further information – see              Illum inated: Engine oil level is too low.        pag e 145.
pages 158, 222.                                     Check engine oil level and top up if
                                                                                                      Diesel engines: I f the tank is run dry, bleed
                                                    necessary. S ee page 218.
 If it illum inates when the ha nd brake is                                                           the fuel sy stem as desc rib ed on pag e 175.
 not ap plied: Stop the vehicle; interrupt          EPS 1)
 your journey immediately . C onsult a              Electri c power steering 3
 work shop. We recom mend y our                     The control indica tor illuminates for a few
 Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer.                     second s w hen the ignition is switched on.
                                                    Illum ination while driving ind icates a fault.
O n vehicles w ith Easytronic 3 control             Driv ing may be continued. More force is
indicator R flashes for a few sec onds after        required for steering. C onsult a workshop .
the ig nition is switched off if the hand           We rec om mend your Vauxhall Authorised
brake has not been applied.                         Repairer.


                                                    1)
                                                         EPS = Electric P ower Steerin g.


32
y                               Transmission display 3
Seat oc cupancy recognition 3   Display of selector lever position for
see pages 84, 89.               autom atic transmission 3 or current gea r
                                or mode for Easytronic 3.
                                Further inform ation – see pages 126, 132.




                                                                             33
                                                                                              Trip odometer
                                                                                              To return to zero, depress reset k nob with
                                                                                              ignition switched on and trip odometer
                                                                                              display activated .
                                                                                              Vehicles with clock in odometer
                                                                                              To set to z ero, hold reset knob down for
                                                                                              app rox . 2 seconds with ignition switched
                                                                                              on and trip od om eter activated .
                                                                                              To switch between trip od om eter and clock
                                                                                              display 3 give reset knob a brief p ress – see
                                                                                              nex t page.
                                                                                              S ervice interval d isplay – see pag e 216.


Tachometer                                    Spee dome ter
Indicates engine speed.                       Indicates the vehicle speed .
Warning zone: M aximum p ermissible           Odome te r
engine sp eed ex ceeded ; danger to engine.   Records the m ileage driven.
                                              With the ignition switched off, briefly press
                                              the reset knob to display the num ber of
                                              mileage driven for approx. 15 seconds.




34
                                              Setting t he t ime
                                              With time displayed, press reset knob in
                                              instrument:
                                              Press for approx . 2 seconds:
                                                 Hours flash
                                              Press briefly
                                                 Set hours
                                              Press for approx . 2 seconds
                                                 Minutes flash
                                              Press briefly
                                                 Set minutes
                                              Press for approx . 2 seconds
                                                 Clock is started



Time display in odometer 3
To sw itc h b etween trip odometer and time
display 3 give reset knob a short press.
When the vehicle lights are on, the
brightness of the display ca n be adjusted
using the right-hand adjuster wheel k
below the light switch – see pa ge 101.




                                                                                         35
                                               For physical reasons, the engine
                                               temperature gauge show s the coolant
                                               temperature only if the coolant level is
                                               adeq uate.
                                               During operation the system is pressurised.
                                               The temp erature ma y therefore rise briefly
                                               to ov er 100 °C.




Coolant te mperature display                                                                  Fuel gauge
Pointer in zone a t                                                                           Pointer in red
left                  = Engine operating                                                      warning zone or
                        temperature not y et                                                  Y illumina ted     = Reserve lev el.
                        reached
                                                                                              Pointer in red
Pointer between                                                                               warning zone or
the z ones            = Normal operating                                                      Y flashing         = Refuel –
                        temperature                                                                                 see pag e 143.
                                                                                              N ever run the tank dry !
Pointer in red
zone                  = Temperature too                                                       Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,
                        high:                                                                 the amount of fuel required to fill the tank
                        Stop vehicle and                                                      ma y be less than the spec ified tank
                        switch off eng ine.                                                   cap acity.
                        Danger to engine.
                        Check coolant level
                        immediately – see
                        page 221.




36
                                                                                               Infotainment system – see infotainment
                                                                                               system op erating instructions.
                                                                                               An F in the display ind icates a fault. H ave
                                                                                               the cause of the fault remedied. We
                                                                                               recommend that y ou consult y our Vauxhall
                                                                                               Authorised Repa irer.




Inform ation display                            Graphica l Informa tion Display 3
Tripl e inform ation d isp lay 3                Display of time, outside temp erature a nd
Display of time, outside tempera ture and       date/infotainment sy stem (when it is on).
date/infotainm ent system (when it is on).      The information that is d isplay ed depend s
When the ignition is off, the time, date and    on the infotainment sy stem configura tion.
outside tem perature can be made to             Some information app ears in an
appear for approx. 15 seconds by briefly        abbrev iated form.
pressing one of the two buttons adjacent
to the d isplay .
An F in the display indica tes a fault. Ha ve
the c ause of the fault rem edied. We
recom mend tha t you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.




                                                                                                                                          37
                                                                                           Caution: The road surface may already
                                                                                           be icy even though the display indicates
                                                                                           a few deg rees ab ov e 0 °C .




Outs ide tempe rature                        In vehicles with graphical inform ation
A fall in temperature is indica ted          display 3, a warning message is shown in
immediately and a rise in temp erature       the display a s a warning for icy road
after a time delay .                         surfaces. There is no message below -5 °C .
If outside tempera ture drops below 3 ° C,
the sym bol : appears in the triple
inform ation d isplay as a warning for icy
road conditions. When temperature
increases to at least 5 °C, the : sy mbol
goes out.




38
                                          Correcting time 3                            Activating a nd deac tiv ating autom atic
                                          Some RDS tra nsmitters do not send correct   time sy nchronisation: Infotainment system
                                          tim e signals. If the incorrect time is      off; press Ö and ; next to the display as
                                          display ed often, deactivate autom atic      follows:
                                          tim e synchronisation 3 a nd set the tim e   Hold down Ö for ap prox . 2 sec. , clock
                                          manually.                                    display is now in setting m ode,
                                          The automatic setting is indicated by } in   Press Ö twice (until year flashes),
                                          the display.
                                                                                       Press Ö and hold down for approx.
                                                                                       3 seconds until } flashes in display and
                                                                                       text "RDS TIME" appears (yea rs flash
                                                                                       during this tim e),
                                                                                       Press ;; display shows:
                                                                                           RDS TIME 0 = O ff,
                                                                                       Press ;; display shows:
Triple inform ation display                                                                RDS TIME 1 = O n,
Setti ng date and time                                                                 Press Ö three tim es.
Infotainm ent system off. Press Ö and ;
nex t to the display as follows:
Press Ö for ap prox . 2 seconds:
    Day fla shes
;: Set day

Ö : Month fla shes
;: Set month

Ö : Year flashes
;: Set year

Ö : Hours flash
;: Set hours

Ö : Minutes flash
;: Set minutes

Ö : Clock is started




                                                                                                                                  39
Graphical information display 3,              To select w ith four-way button:              To select with multifunction button 3:
selecting functions                           Select options v ia the m enus and with the   Turn       Mark m enu options,
The functions and settings of some            buttons/four-w ay button on the                          functions or com mands
equipm ent 3 can be accessed via the          infotainment system 3.
graphical information disp lay.                                                             Press      Select ma rk ed item,
                                                                                                       confirm command.
Functions are selected and executed in the
menu on the display using the four-way                                                      To exit a m enu, turn the m ultifunction
                                                                                            button left or right to Return or M ain and
button, the m ultifunction b utton 3 on the
infotainment sy stem or the buttons 3 on                                                    select.
the steering wheel.




40
To select with steering wheel b uttons 3:   Each function has a main page, w hich is     System settings
                                            selected from the upper row of the display   The settings are accessed via the Setting s
Select menu options v ia the m enus using
                                            (not in infotainm ent system C D 30):        menu.
the b uttons.
                                            z   Audio,                                   Press the Ma in button 3 (not found on all
                                            z   Na vigation 3,                           infota inm ent sy stems) on the infota inm ent
                                            z   Telephone 3 ,                            system (c all up main display).
                                            z   Trip comp uter 3.                        Press the S ett ings button on the
                                            For audio, nav igation 3 and telephone       infota inm ent system. For infotainm ent
                                            functions 3, see infotainment sy stem        system CD 30, no menu m ay b e selected.
                                            instructions.                                The Settings menu opens.




                                                                                                                                     41
                                         Correcting time 3
                                         Some RDS transmitters 1) do not send
                                         correct time sig nals. If the incorrect time is
                                         display ed often, deactivate autom atic
                                         tim e synchronisation 3 a nd set the tim e
                                         manually.
                                         To correct time using RDS , select menu
                                         item Sync hron clock , automat ical from the
                                         Ti me, Date menu.
                                         The box in front of Synchron. clock
                                         automat ical. will be ticked, see
                                         Fig. 15566 T.



Setti ng date and time                                                                     Languag e selection
Select menu item Time, Dat e from the                                                      Y ou can select the display language for
Setti ng s menu.                                                                           some functions.
The m enu for Time, Date is displayed.                                                     S elec t menu item Language from the
Select the menu items required:                                                            Sett ings menu.

Make the desired setting.                                                                  The available languages are displayed.




                                         1)
                                              R DS = R ad io Data System.


42
Select the desired language.                     Setting unit s of m easur e                    Ad just contrast 3
                                                 You can select which units of measure are      S elec t menu item Cont rast from the
Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of
                                                 to be used .                                   Sett ings menu.
the m enu item .
                                                 Select menu item U ni ts from the S et tings   The menu for Contr ast is disp layed .
In systems with language version 3, when
                                                 menu.
the la nguage setting of the display is                                                         C onfirm the required setting .
changed , the system will ask if the m essag e   The ava ilab le units are display ed.
language should also be changed – see            Select the desired unit.
infotainment sy stem instructions.
                                                 Selections are indicated by a o in front of
                                                 the menu item.




                                                                                                                                         43
Setti ng displa y mod e 3
The d isplay can be adap ted to light
conditions: Bla ck tex t on a light
back ground or w hite tex t on a dark
back ground.
Select menu item Day/N ight from the
Setti ng s menu.
The options are display ed.
Autom atic: Adapted based on v ehicle
lighting .
Alw ays da y design: Black text on light
back ground.
Alw ays night desi gn: White text on dark
back ground.
                                              Graphical information dis play,                 Ra ng e
Selections are indicated by a o in front of   trip com puter 3                                Range is calculated from current fuel tank
the m enu item .                                                                              content and instantaneous consumption.
                                              The trip computers provide information on
Ig n. logic 3                                 driving data, which is continually recorded     The display shows av erage values.
See infotainment system instructions.         and ev alua ted electronically.                 After refuelling, the vehicle updates the
                                              The trip computer main page provides            range automatically a fter a brief delay .
                                              information on range and instantaneous
                                              consumption.
                                              To display the driving data of the other trip
                                              computer, p ress the BC button on the
                                              infotainment system 3 or select the trip
                                              computer menu from the display.
                                              With Infotainment S ystem CD 30 3, the trip
                                              computer is only operated w ith the left
                                              button of the steering wheel remote
                                              control.




44
                                                   Di st ance trav ell ed
                                                   Shows the number of mileage travelled.
                                                   The m easurement can be re-started a t any
                                                   tim e. See next column.
                                                   Average speed
                                                   Calculation of avera ge speed. The
                                                   measurement can be re-started at any
                                                   tim e. See next column.
                                                   Stoppages in the journey with the ignition
                                                   off are not includ ed in the calculations.
                                                   Effectiv e consum ption
                                                   Shows amount of fuel consumed. The
                                                   measurement can be re-started at any
                                                   tim e. See next column.
If the fuel in the tank will allow less tha n 30   Average consumpt ion                         Reset ting t rip com puter informat ion
miles (50 km), a warning "Range" appears           Calculation of avera ge c onsumption. The    The following trip com puter inform ation
on the d isplay .                                  measurement can be re-started at any         can b e reset (restart measurements):
                                                   tim e. See next column.
Acknowled ge the menu item as desc rib ed                                                       z   Distance travelled
on page 40.                                                                                     z   Average speed
                                                                                                z   Effective consum ption
Instant aneous consump tion
                                                                                                z   Average consum ption
Display changes depending on speed :
                                                                                                S elec t BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer
Display in gal/h    below 8 mph (13 km/h)
                                                                                                menu.
Display in mp g     above 8 mph (13 km/h)




                                                                                                                                            45
                                                                                                    I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly
                                                                                                    If the power supp ly has been interrupted or
                                                                                                    if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low,
                                                                                                    the values stored in the trip computer w ill
                                                                                                    be lost.




The information of the two trip c om puters     To reset all information of a trip computer,
can be reset separately, thus making it         select m enu item All v alues.
possible to ev aluate da ta over different      After resetting, " - - -" is d isplay ed with the
periods of time.                                trip computer information selected. The
Select the desired trip computer                recalculated values are displayed after a
inform ation.                                   brief delay.
The v alue for the selected function will b e
reset and reca lculated.




46
                                        Different stop watch func tions can be
                                        selected from the Opti ons 3 menu:
                                        Dr iving Ti me excl. S tops
                                        The time the v ehicle is in m otion is
                                        recorded . Stationary tim e is not includ ed.
                                        Dr iving Ti me incl. S tops
                                        The time the v ehicle is in m otion is
                                        recorded . The tim e the vehicle is sta tionary
                                        with the key in the starter sw itc h is
                                        included.
                                        Tr avel Time
                                        Measurement of the time from manual
                                        activation via Sta rt to manual deactivation
                                        via Reset .
Stop wat ch
Select menu item Timer from the Board
Com puter menu.
The Tim er menu opens.
To start, selec t menu item St art.
To reset, selec t menu item Reset .




                                                                                          47
                                             As the vehicle aeria l is relatively near the    Infotainm ent s yste m 3
                                             ground, the broadcasting compa nies              The infotainment system is operated as
                                             cannot g uarantee the sa me quality of           desc ribed in the operating instructions.
                                             reception a s obtained with a d om estic
                                             ra dio using an ov erhead aerial.
                                             z C hanges in distance from the
                                               transm itter,
                                             z multi-path rec eption due to reflection
                                               and
                                             z sha dowing
                                             may c ause hissing , noise, distortion or loss
                                             of reception a ltogether.




Radio reception 3
Ca r radio reception differs from domestic
radio reception:




48
                                               Mobile telephones and radio                      O btain advice on predetermined
                                               equipm ent (CB) 3                                insta lla tion locations for the ex ternal
                                               The Vauxhall installation instructions and       antenna a nd equipment hold er and ways
                                               the opera ting guid elines provided by the       of using d evices with transmission power of
                                               telep hone ma nufacturer must be ob served       more than 10 Watts. We recommend that
                                               when fitting and opera ting a mobile             y ou consult your Vaux hall Authorised
                                               telep hone. Failure to do so could invalidate    Repairer, who will have brackets a nd
                                               the v ehicle’ s operating permit (EU Directive   va rious installation kits available as
                                               95/54/EG).                                       acc essories and will install them in
                                                                                                acc orda nce with regula tions.
                                               Prerequisites for fault-free operation:
                                                                                                Be sure to use the handsfree attachment if
                                               z Professionally installed exterior a erial to   using the telep hone whilst driving. Even this
                                                 obtain the maximum rang e possib le,           can b e a distraction while driving. Plea se
                                               z max imum transmission power 10 Watt,           observe country -sp ecific regulations.
                                               z installation of the telephone in a suitable     When used in the vehic le interior, mobile
Ele ctronic data acquis ition in toll            spot (see note on page 92).                     telephones a nd radio eq uipm ent (CB)
systems
                                                                                                 with integrated aerial may c ause
O n vehicles w ith heat-reflecting                                                               malfunctions in the vehicle electronics.
windscreens 1) 3, mount the chipcard for
electronic data ac quisition and billing in                                                      Mobile telephones and ra dio equipment
the b lack shaded zone of the windscreen                                                         (CB) should only be used with an aerial
on the left or the right behind the interior                                                     fitted on the vehicle ex terior.
mirror, see illustration. If the chipcard is
mounted outside this zone, there may be
malfunctions in data acquisition.




1)
     So la r R eflect.


                                                                                                                                           49
Keys, doors, bonnet   Re place ment ke ys
                      The key is a c onstituent of the electronic
                      immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall
                      Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem -
                      free op eration of the electronic
                      immobiliser.
                      Keep the sp are k ey in a safe spot.
                      Locks, see pa ge 230.

                      Locking / unlocking
                      From outside
                      Radio rem ote control 3 – see p age 52,
                      central locking system 3 – see page 54,
                      mechanical operation – see pages 4, 56.
                      From inside                                    Child safety locks 3
                      Push down or pull up lock button. To
                      prevent the driver from being inad vertently    Use the child safety lock whenever
                      lock ed out, the button on the driver’s door    child ren a re oc cup ying on the rear seats.
                      cannot b e depressed when the d oor is          Disregard may lea d to injuries or
                      op en.                                          endanger life. Vehicle p assengers should
                                                                      be informed accordingly.

                                                                     Turn rota ry knob at rear door lock from
                                                                     vertical position using key: Door cannot be
                                                                     opened from the inside.




50
Ele ctronic imm obilise r                     Control i nd icator for imm obiliser A             If control indica tor A illuminates after the
The sy stem checks whether the vehicle m ay   Control indica tor A illuminates briefly           eng ine has started, there is a fault in the
be sta rted using the key that has been       after the ig nition is sw itc hed on.              eng ine electronic s or the automatic
inserted. If the k ey is recognised as                                                           transmission – see pages 136, 148.
                                              If the control indicator flashes w hen the
"authorised" the vehicle can be started.      ignition is on, there is a fault in the sy stem;   Not e
The c heck is carried out via a transponder   the engine cannot be started. S witc h off         The immobiliser does not lock the doors.
housed in the k ey – see page 53.             the ignition and then rep eat the start            Therefore, alwa ys lock vehicle before
The electronic imm ob iliser activates        attempt.                                           leaving unattended and ena ble Vauxhall
automatically when the k ey is removed                                                           alarm sy stem 3 – see page 60.
                                              If control indicator A continues to flash,
from the starter switch.                      try to start the eng ine using the spare k ey      The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s
                                              and consult a work shop. We recomm end             data and should therefore not be kept in
                                              your Vaux hall Authorised Repairer.                the vehicle.
                                                                                                 Hav e y our Car Pass on hand when
                                                                                                 consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer.




                                                                                                                                            51
                                                                                             Fault
                                                                                             If the central locking system cannot be
                                                                                             operated w ith the radio remote control, it
                                                                                             ma y be due to the following :
                                                                                             z The range of the radio remote control
                                                                                               ha s b een exc eeded.
                                                                                             z Remote control battery voltage is too
                                                                                               low . Battery rep la cement – see next
                                                                                               page.
                                                                                             z Frequent, repeated operation of the
                                                                                               radio rem ote control outside the
                                                                                               reception ra nge of the vehicle (e.g. too
                                                                                               far from vehicle, remote c ontrol is then
                                                                                               no longer recognised). Remote control
                                                                                               sy nchronisation – see next pa ge.
Radio rem ote control 3                       Handle the rad io remote control with ca re,
The rad io remote control is integrated in    protect it from m oisture and high             z If the central locking system is
the k ey.                                     temperatures and avoid unnecessary               overloaded as a result of repeated
                                              op eration.                                      operation at short intervals. The power
Used to op erate:                                                                              supply is cut off for a brief period .
z central locking system,                     The hazard warning lig hts come on to
z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,     indica te that the remote control is           z Interferenc e from higher-power radio
z Vauxhall ala rm system 3 .                  op erational.                                    waves from other sources.

The rad io remote control has a ra nge of     Central l oc king syst em ,                    We recommend that you consult your
approx. 3 metres. This range can be           see p age 54.                                  Vauxhall Authorised Repairer to have the
affected by outside influenc es. Aim the                                                     cause of the fault remedied .
                                              Mec hanical a nti-theft lock ing system 3,
rem ote control at the v ehicle to operate.   see p age 54.                                  O perating the central locking system with
                                                                                             the key – see following pages.
                                              Va uxhall alarm system 3,
                                              see p age 60.




52
Remote contr ol batt ery replac em ent           Open the rem ote control. Prise out ba ttery    Ra dio remote control synchronisation
Replace the battery as soon a s the range        with screwdriver. Rep lace b attery (b attery   If functionality is lost, synchronise the radio
of the rad io remote control begins to           type – see page 253), ensuring that it is       remote control:
shrink.                                          inserted correctly. C lose the remote control
                                                 and audibly engage. Insert the remote           1. Switch on ignition; sy stem will then
Separate the key p art from the radio                                                               remain in synchroniz ing mode for
                                                 control in the key part and engage.
rem ote control using a screwdriver as                                                              30 seconds.
illustrated.                                     Battery replacement m ust be performed
                                                                                                 2. Briefly press button p or q on the radio
                                                 within 3 minutes. O therwise the rem ote
The transponder for the immobiliser is in                                                           remote c ontrol unit with the unit inserted
                                                 control will have to be resy nchronised – see
the front of the key. Make sure that it is not                                                      in the ignition.
                                                 next column.
dam aged or detached.
                                                 Make sure that you dispose of old batteries     3. The central lock ing sy stem locks and
Position screwdriver and open remote                                                                unlocks to show that the remote c ontrol
                                                 in accordance with environmental
control by m aking a gentle rotary                                                                  ha s b een sy nchronized.
                                                 protection regulations.
movement – see figure abov e.




                                                                                                                                              53
Central locking system 3                       To secure wit h the mechanical anti-theft     To unlock
for doors, sliding d oors, luggage             locking system 3                              Press button q on the radio remote control
compartment and tank flap 3.                   All doors must be closed. N o more than       – or –
                                               10 seconds after unlock ing, press button p   pull lock button on driver’s door.
To lock                                        on the radio remote control again
Press button p on the rad io rem ote control                                                 When the mechanical anti-theft lock ing
– or –                                         Lock buttons on all doors are p ositioned     system 3 is enabled, the doors cannot be
push the lock b utton on the d riv er’s door   such that doors cannot be opened.             unlocked by p ulling up the lock buttons.
when the doors are closed.                     If the ignition was on, the d riv er’s door   C ountry-specific v ersion 3: Pressing the
                                               must be opened and closed in order to lock    button onc e will unlock the driver’ s door.
                                               the vehicle.                                  Pressing the button twice will unlock the
                                                                                             entire vehicle.
                                                Do not use the system if there are peop le
                                                in the vehicle! The d oors cannot be
                                                unloc ked from inside.




54
Note                                                                                                  O verload
                                                   z To lock the doors from inside (e.g. to
z To prevent the driver from being                                                                    The power supply is cut off for a brief
                                                     prevent unwanted entry from outside),
  inad vertently locked out, the button on                                                            period if the central locking system is
                                                     push down lock button on driver’ s d oor.
  the driver’s door cannot b e d epressed                                                             repeatedly operated at short interv als.
  when the d oor is open.                          z Locked doors unlock automatically if             The sy stem is protected by a fuse in the
                                                     an acc ident of a c ertain severity
z If the driv er’s door is not closed properly ,                                                      fuse box – see page 194.
                                                     occurs (to permit outsid e assistance).
  the central lock ing sy stem will unlock           Prerequisite: Ignition must not be
  again immediately after locking.
                                                     switched off.
z 30 seconds after unlocking using the
                                                   z C om bo: I f a sliding door is open when the
  ra dio remote control the doors lock               vehicle is loc ked, the slid ing d oor locks a
  again automatically if no door is
                                                     few seconds after it is closed.
  op ened.




                                                                                                                                                  55
                                                To lock
                                                With driver’ s door closed, turn key towa rd s
                                                rear of vehicle until it will not move any
                                                further. Turn key back to v ertical position
                                                and rem ov e.
                                                If the centra l locking system is not
                                                functional, the other doors ca n be
                                                unlocked or locked by pulling or pushing
                                                the interior door lock (only possib le if the
                                                anti-theft lock ing sy stem 3 is not activ e).
                                                Have the ca use of the fault rem edied. We
                                                recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
                                                Authorised Repairer.



Operating door locks us ing the key in                                                           Sliding doors 3, Combo
the drive r’s door lock                                                                          To open sliding doors, pull handle towards
To unlock                                                                                        rear of vehicle.
Turn key in lock toward front of vehic le as                                                     To prev ent damage, the right-ha nd sliding
far as it will go. Turn k ey back to vertical                                                    door c annot be fully opened if the tank flap
position and remove.                                                                             is open.

                                                                                                  If the v ehicle is pa rked fa cing down a
                                                                                                  slope, open sliding d oors may shut
                                                                                                  accidentally on account of their weig ht.
                                                                                                  Before d riv ing off, check that the sliding
                                                                                                  doors are properly closed.




56
                                               Usi ng the cent ral lock ing system with the
                                               luggag e c om part ment
                                               The luggage compartment lock cannot b e
                                               used to lock or unlock the central locking
                                               sy stem or the a nti-theft locking system 3.
                                               When unlocked, open the luggag e
                                               compartment by pressing the b utton.
                                               Key slot in loc k in horiz ontal p osition
                                               The luggage compartment is loc ked and
                                               unlocked using the central lock ing system.
                                               If the key is turned to the horizontal
                                               position after unlocking via the central
                                               lock ing sy stem, the lugga ge com partment
                                               remains locked.
Luggage compartment                                                                           K ey slot in lock in vertical p osition
Locking                                                                                       The lugg age compartment a lso remains
Turn key to vertica l position.                                                               locked when unlocking v ia the central
                                                                                              locking system . Choose this position if the
To unlock                                                                                     luggage compa rtm ent is to alway s b e
Turn key to horiz ontal p osition.                                                            locked. Turn the key anticlockwise past the
The lock is released by pressing the button.                                                  resistance p oint as far as it w ill go.




                                                                                                                                        57
Unlock ing the lugg age compa rtment         Relock the luggage compartment by               Tail gate, C ombo
wi th doors centrally lock ed                closing it and turning the k ey to the          O pen right-hand door from outside by
Turn key clockwise a s far as possible       horizontal or vertical position.                raising door handle or from inside by
beyond the resistance from the vertical or                                                   pressing handle.
                                             In the horizonta l position, the lug gage
horiz ontal position. Key cannot be          compartment will be unlocked the next           Release left-hand door from inside by
withdrawn to safeguard a gainst being        tim e the vehicle is unlocked via the central   pressing handle.
locked out.                                  lock ing sy stem.                               The doors are arrested at a 90° angle. To
                                                                                             close, push the doors beyond the slight
                                                                                             resistance.




58
Both doors c an be op ened up to 180°:          Note
Close the door slig htly from the 90°           z The hatch has a ha ndle on the inside of
position, diseng age the stop lug from the        the ta ilg ate to a ssist c losing.
guide rail and open the door completely .       z Fitting of acc essories on the tailga te will
If the rear doors are opened up to 180°, the      increase its w eight. If it becomes too
rea r exterior lights are no long er visible.     hea vy, it will then not sta y open.
When driving in the dark, therefore, do not
                                                z The registration plate can only b e clearly
open the rear doors beyond the point at           seen if the tailgate is closed. I t is
which they lock into position.
                                                  therefore not p ermitted to d riv e with the
When closing, make sure that the stop lug         tailgate open.
properly engag es in the guide rail.
                                                 Do not drive with the luggag e
                                                 compa rtm ent open when transporting
                                                 bulky goods, since poisonous exhaust
                                                 fumes ca n penetrate the interior d ue to
                                                 air turbulence.




                                                                                                  59
Vauxhall alarm s yste m 3
monitors
z the doors, luggage compartment,
  bonnet,
z the passenger c om partment,
z vehicle tilt, e. g. if it is raised,
z the ignition.




                                         To activ ate                                  Act ivat ion without monitoring of
                                         All d oors, windows, the sun roof 3 and the   pa ssenger comp artment a nd vehicle ti lt
                                         bonnet must be closed. Within 10 seconds      e.g. if anim als a re to be left in the vehic le.
                                         of lock ing, press button p on the remote     1. Close luggage comp artm ent and
                                         control aga in.                                  bonnet.
                                         If the ignition was on, the d riv er’s door   2. Press button in front of the c ourtesy light
                                         must b e opened a nd closed in order to          (with ig nition off); LED in the haz ard
                                         activate the Vauxhall alarm system .             warning light button flashes a max imum
                                                                                          of 10 seconds.
                                                                                       3. Close doors.
                                                                                       4. Switch on Vauxhall alarm system . LED
                                                                                          illuminates. After approx . 10 second s,
                                                                                          the system is ac tiv ated without
                                                                                          monitoring of the passeng er
                                                                                          compartment or vehicle tilt. The LED
                                                                                          fla shes until the system is switched off.




60
                                                After the first 10 second s of Vauxhall alarm
                                                sy stem activation:
                                                z LED flashes           = Sy stem on,
                                                z LED illuminates for
                                                  approx . 1 second = Sw itc h-off.
                                                If a system fa ult occ urs, consult a
                                                work shop. We recom mend y our Vauxhall
                                                Authorised Repairer.




Light emit ting d iode (LED)                                                                    To deact ivat e
During the first 10 sec onds of the Vaux hall                                                   Press button q on remote control.
alarm system activation:                                                                        – or –
                                                                                                switch on the ignition.
z LED illum inated   =    Test, switch-on
                          delay ,                                                               If there is a fault in radio remote control,
                                                                                                turn key in driver’s door lock toward front
z LED blinks         =    Door, tailgate,
                                                                                                of vehic le as far as it will go. Then turn key
                          bonnet open
                                                                                                bac k to vertical position and remove.
                          or system error.
                                                                                                If the alarm is triggered w hen the driv er’s
                                                                                                door is opened, d eactivate the Vauxhall
                                                                                                alarm sy stem by sw itc hing on the ignition.




                                                                                                                                             61
                                              3. C lose lug gage compartment.                  Ala rm
                                                                                               If the Va ux ha ll alarm system is a ctivated,
                                              4. To lock: Turn key back to horizontal or
                                                                                               the alarm can b e triggered and give off:
                                                 vertical position. M onitoring of the
                                                                                               z an acoustic signal (horn) a nd
                                                 interior and v ehicle tilt is enabled after
                                                                                               z a visual sig nal (haz ard warning lights).
                                                 approx . 10 second s.
                                                                                               The number and duration of the alarm are
                                                                                               determined by law.
                                                                                               The a larm can be dea ctiv ated by pressing
                                                                                               a button of the ra dio remote control or
                                                                                               by sw itc hing on the ignition. Pressing
                                                                                               button q or switching on the ig nition will
                                                                                               deactivate the Vauxhall alarm sy stem at
                                                                                               the sam e time.


O peni ng and cl osing tailg ate wit h
anti -theft alarm system ac tiva ted
1. To unlock: Turn key cloc kwise as far as
   possible. Luggag e com partment is
   unlocked and m onitoring of the interior
   and vehicle tilt is disa bled.
2. Open lug gage compartment.




62
Bonnet                                        To op en completely , locate safety catch       To hold the bonnet in the open position,
To open the bonnet, p ull the release lever   approximately a ha nd’ s width to the right     insert the support rod located at right
located on the driver’s sid e below the       of centre as viewed from the front: Lift this   angles a bove the radiator grille into the
instrument panel. The bonnet will then be     up wards and open b onnet.                      small slot in the underside of the bonnet.
unlock ed and will partially op en. Return    Any dirt or snow on the bonnet can slide        Before closing bonnet, press sup port rod
release lever to its original position.       down towards the windscreen when the            firmly into its retainer. Low er the bonnet
                                              bonnet is opened and block the air intake –     gradually and then allow it to fall into the
                                              see p age 124.                                  lock under its ow n weight.
                                                                                              C heck that the b onnet is locked in position
                                                                                              by pulling at its front edge. If it is not
                                                                                              eng aged, repeat the procedure.




                                                                                                                                         63
Seats, interior




                  Se at adjustment                                Head restraint position
                  see p age 5.                                    The centre of the head restraint should be
                                                                  at eye lev el. Ad just to highest position if
                  Se at position                                  this is not possib le for extremely tall
                  Ad just driver’s seat such that with the        people, and adjust to lowest position for
                  driver sitting upright the steering wheel is    extrem ely small people.
                  held in the area of its upper spokes with the
                  driver’s arm s slightly bent.                    Disregard of these instructions ma y lead
                                                                   to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle
                  Push passenger sea t as far back as              passeng ers should be inform ed
                  possible.                                        accordingly.
                  The seat b ackrests must not be tilted too
                  fa r back (recommend ed tilting angle           S etting – see pa ge 7 and the nex t page.
                  approx. 25°).

                   Disregard of these instructions may lead
                   to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle
                   passengers should be informed
                   accordingly.




64
Head restraints                             Rea r hea d restraints 3 , Corsa                Rear, cent re head restra int 3, Combo
Setting – see page 7.                       In order to im prov e v ision when rear seats   The head restraint can b e pushed right
                                            are unoccupied, push hea d restraints as far    down to improve visib ility if the centre rear
To rem ov e head restraints, release both   down as possible. Push detent springs to        seat is unoccupied or to allow the rear seat
springs by pressing and detach head         relea se.                                       bac krests to be folded down. To d o so,
restraint.                                                                                  release b oth springs by p ressing.
                                            If the rear seats are occupied, adjust the
The rear, centre head restraint 3 in the    rear head restraints to the occupants’ body     If the centre seat is oc cup ied, set the head
Com bo cannot be removed.                   size – see p age 7.                             restraint to the first or second position
                                                                                            acc ording to the height of the passenger.
                                            To increase luggage comp artm ent size –
                                            see p age 66, removing rear head
                                            restra ints 3: Push both detent springs to
                                            relea se, remove head restraint.




                                                                                                                                        65
Extending the luggage compartment,               Fold ing down t he rear seat back rests           Unlock the single-piece rea r seat back rest
Corsa                                            Slot the latch plates of the seat belts in the    or split rear seat backrests 3 b y pulling on
Cha ng ing angl e of rear seat back rest         holders 3 in the side trim cover.                 the handles and fold it/them down onto the
Release one-piece rea r seat back rest or                                                          rear seat.
                                                 Removing rear head restraints 3 – p ush
split rea r set backrests 3 using ha ndles and   detent springs to release – see page 65.
tilt forward a little.
                                                 Remove the push-in sleev es for mounting
The rear seat b ackrests can be locked in        the ISO -FI X child restraint sy stem – see the
two positions.                                   separate instructions for the IS O-FIX child
                                                 restra int system .




66
– or –                                           Unlock the single-piece rear seat backrest      Repositioni ng the rea r sea ts
slot the latch plates of the seat belts in       or split rear seat bac krests 3 by pulling on   When repositioning the bac krest, pull the
the holders in the sid e trim c ov er – see      the handles and tilt it/them forwards.          seat belts forw ard slightly. Audibly engag e
Fig. 11585 S on previous pa ge.                                                                  the backrest in the intermediate or end
                                                                                                 position. There is a loc k indicator 3 on the
Removing rea r head restraints 3 – push
                                                                                                 handles. If the bac krest is properly
detent springs to release – see page 65.
                                                                                                 eng aged, the red field 3 will not be visible
Remove the push-in sleeves for m ounting                                                         on the handle.
the IS O-FIX child restra int system – see the
                                                                                                 Fold the rear seat d ow n and push it into
separate instructions for the ISO -FIX child
                                                                                                 place b etween the back rest and the v ehicle
restraint sy stem.
                                                                                                 floor. Press on the front edge of the rear
Raise front edge of single-piece ba ckrest or                                                    seat to lock it audibly into p la ce.
split backrest 3 and tilt forward.
                                                                                                 Refit the hea d restraints 3 .
                                                                                                 The three-point seat b elt on the centre
                                                                                                 rear seat can only be pulled out of the
                                                                                                 retrac tor 3 if the rear seat b ackrest is
                                                                                                 eng aged.




                                                                                                                                              67
Remov ing lugga ge compa rtment cov er      Luggage com partm ent ex tension,                 – Or –
To rem ov e, unhook the retaining strap s   Combo Crew van                                    remove rear, outer head restraints 3 – push
from the ta ilg ate.                        Fold ing down t he rear seat back rests           detent springs to release – see pag e 65.
Remove the cover from the side guides and   Remove rear, outer head restraints 3 –            Push rea r, centre head restra int 3 down as
place it behind the seat backrests.         Push detent sp rings to release – see             far as possib le – push detent springs to
                                            page 65. Push rear, centre head restraint 3       release – see page 65.
Fit in reverse order.                       down as far as possible – push detent             Hook seat belt buckles on rea r seat
Notes on load ing                           springs to release – see page 65.                 bac krests.
see page 74.                                Remove the push-in sleev es for mounting          Remove the push-in sleeves for m ounting
                                            the ISO -FI X child restraint sy stem – see the   the I SO-FIX child restraint system – see the
                                            separate instructions for the IS O-FIX child      sepa ra te instructions for the ISO -FI X child
                                            restra int system .                               restraint system.
                                            Unlock one single-piece rear sea t backrest       Pull up one or both rear seat cushions using
                                            or both using pushbuttons and fold down           straps provided .
                                            onto rear seat.




68
                                              Rep osi tioning the rear seats
                                              Pull the seat belt slightly forward so that it
                                              does not get damaged and aud ib ly
                                              engage the b ackrest.
                                              Push back rear sea t cushions.
                                              Insert outer rear head restraints 3.
                                              The three-point seat belt on the centre
                                              rear seat can only be pulled out of the
                                              retractor 3 if the rear sea t backrest is
                                              engaged.




Disengage one or b oth rea r seat backrests                                                    Folding d own the front pa ssenger sea t 3
using the pushbuttons and fold down.                                                           Push p assenger seat head restraint down
                                                                                               and remove – see pa ge 65.
                                                                                               S lid e the front passenger seat back .
                                                                                               Fold front p assenger seat forward b y
                                                                                               raising release lever.
                                                                                               To restore, p ress the release lever forward,
                                                                                               restore the front seat back rest to an
                                                                                               upright position and aud ibly eng age.
                                                                                               Not es on load ing
                                                                                               see page 74.

                                                                                               Lashing eyes 3
                                                                                               The lashing eyes in the lug gage
                                                                                               compa rtm ent are for securing transported
                                                                                               items to prevent them from slipping
                                                                                               around.




                                                                                                                                          69
                                                                                            Fitti ng
                                                                                            Push left sid e of cover into retainers,
                                                                                            followed by right side.
                                                                                            Push b utton at right end piece of cover,
                                                                                            and c ov er engages.




Luggage compartment cover 3, and             Rem oving
Combo Crew van                               Open cover.
To close                                     Press button at right side of c ov er and
Pull cover towa rd s rear of vehicle using   engage by pushing right-hand end p iece
handle and hook into side retainers.         to the left. Pull right side of cover out of
Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged        retainers, followed by left side.
objects on the cover.
To open
Unhook cover. It reels in automatically.




70
Safety net 3, Com bo and Com bo                 Fit ting behind t he rear seats                Fitti ng behind front seats
Cre w van                                       Fold d own both rear seat backrests, hook      Pull up both rear seat cushions. Fold down
The safety net ca n be fitted behind the rear   tensioning stra ps into lashing ey es in       rear seat backrests. Hook tensioning stra ps
seats or, with the rear seat backrest folded    vehicle floor a nd tighten them. Rep osition   into lashing eyes in vehicle floor a nd
down, b ehind the front seats.                  and engag e rear seat ba ckrests.              tighten them.

Passeng ers m ust not be carried behind the                                                    Remov ing
safety net.                                                                                    S wivel tensioning strap length adjusters
                                                                                               upward and unhook straps. O pen the
There are two installation openings in the                                                     cover. Unhook upper net rod and close
roof frame: O pen cover. Suspend upper net                                                     cover.
rod at one side and engage in position. Pull
net rod apart, suspend at other side and
enga ge in p osition. Close c ov er.




                                                                                                                                           71
Load compartment grille 3, Com bo               Engage lev er on load c om partment g rille     Lock load com partment g rille in retainer.
A load c om partment g rille is provided        at top position, as shown in illustration.      To do so, engage lever at bottom position,
behind the front seats to prevent the                                                           as show n in illustration.
                                                Engaging the lever prevents dama ge to
vehic le occupants from being injured by        the front passenger’s seat.
loose cargo.                                                                                     The load c om partment grille must
                                                Position load compartment grille ab ov e         always be locked in one of the retainers
Sp lit load comp artment g rille 3              retainer in front passeng er’s seat backrest.    when the vehicle is in use, and the lever
To enlarge the load compartment, the                                                             must be engaged at its bottom position.
grille can be moved forwards on the front
passenger’s side.                                                                               Not es on load ing
Push head restraint on front pa ssenger’s                                                       see page 74.
seat down as far as it will go – see page 65.
                                                                                                Lashing eyes 3
Tilt front p assenger’s seat bac krest                                                          Lashing eyes are provid ed in the load
forward by raising release lever and p ush
                                                                                                compa rtm ent so that cargo can be secured
down to lock in position.                                                                       to prevent it from slipping.




72
                                                                                                   Stowage compartment above front
                                                                                                   se ats, Combo
                                                                                                   The compartment is only suitable for
                                                                                                   stowing light objects. Max imum load:
                                                                                                   15 kg.

                                                                                                    Secure objects to prevent them from
                                                                                                    falling out a nd causing injury.




Bag hangers 3                                   Stow age compartment 3 beneath
O n the back of the rear seat back rest there   pass enge r se at
are two fixtures on which carrier b ags can     Lift tray by grasping recessed edge and
be hung. Maxim um load: 10 kg.                  pull forwards. Maximum load : 1 kg. To
                                                close the tray push it in and lock it in plac e.




                                                                                                                                           73
                                               z If objects are being transp orted in the     z Weights, payload and roof loa d – see
                                                 luggage/load compartment, the rear             page 240.
                                                 seat backrests must be locked in position    z Driv ing with a roof load (see pages 138,
                                                 – see p ages 67, 69.                           141, 165) increases the sensitivity of the
                                               z Do not a llow the load to protrude ab ov e     vehicle to crosswinds and has a
                                                 the upp er edge of the rear seat               detrimenta l effec t on vehicle handling
                                                 back rests, or above the upper ed ge of        owing to the vehicle’s higher centre of
                                                 the front seat b ackrests if the rear seat     gravity.
                                                 back rests a re folded down.                 z Combo: If objects are tra nsported in the
                                               z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit       loa d compartment, the split load
                                                 (cushion) 3 m ust alway s be freely            compartment grille 3 must a lw ays be
                                                 accessible.                                    loc ked in one of the retainers and the
                                                                                                lever must be engaged at its bottom
                                               z Do not place any objects in front of the
                                                                                                position – see pa ge 72.
                                                 rea r window or on the instrument pa nel.
                                                 They are reflected in the glass, obstruct    z Combo: Close the luggag e compartment
Notes on loading the vehicle                     the driver’s view and will be thrown           cover so there is no reflection in the rear
z Heav y objec ts in the lug gage/load           through the vehicle, for insta nce in the      window.
  com partment should be placed as far           event of heavy b ra king.
  forward as p ossible against the rear seat                                                  z Combo: When stowing objects in the
  backrests or, if the rear seat backrests     z No objects must be plac ed in the area in      stowage comp artm ent above the front
  are folded down, ag ainst the front seat       which the airb ags inflate, as they could      seats, secure against falling out.
  backrests. If objects are to be stacked,       cause injury when the airbag s a re
                                                 triggered.                                    Disregard of these notes c an lead to
  the heav ier objects should be placed at
                                                                                               injuries which ma y be fatal. Vehicle
  the bottom. Unsecured objects in the         z The load must not hinder hand brake
                                                                                               passeng ers should be inform ed
  lugga ge/load compartm ent would be            opera tion or gear shifting or im pair the    accordingly.
  thrown forward with great force, for           driver in any w ay.
  instance in the ev ent of heav y brak ing.
                                               z Do not d riv e with luggage com partment
z Secure heav y objec ts with lashing            open when transp orting bulky objects,
  straps 3 a ttac hed to lashing ey es 3 –       for ex ample, sinc e toxic exhaust fumes
  see page 72. If heavy loads slip when the      could penetrate the interior.
  vehicle is braked heavily or driven
  around a bend, the handling of the
  vehicle may chang e.




74
                                                                                           The maximum power c onsumption of
                                                                                           electrical ac cessories m ust not ex ceed
                                                                                           120 w atts.
                                                                                           Do not connect any current-delivering
                                                                                           acc essories, e.g. electrical charging
                                                                                           devices or b atteries.
                                                                                           Electrical ac cessories connected to the
                                                                                           socket must c om ply with the electrom ag-
                                                                                           netic comp atibility requirements laid down
                                                                                           in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise v ehicle
                                                                                           ma lfunctions m ay occur.




Cigarette lighte r ) 3                      Accessory socket 3
In the centre console.                      The accessory socket or cigarette lighter
                                            socket can be used to c onnect electrical
Press in cigarette lighter with ignition
                                            accessories. The socket is op erational
switched on. S witches off autom atically
                                            when the ignition is switched on. Use of the
when elem ent is glowing. Withdraw
                                            socket disc harges the battery if the engine
cigarette lighter.
                                            is not running. Do not damage the socket
                                            by using unsuitable plug s.




                                                                                                                                       75
Ashtray 3                                    To empty , open the ashtra y cover fully          Rear a sht ray 3
To be used only for ash and not for          bey ond its resistance p oint, causing the        To open, swivel the cover upwards.
combustible rubbish.                         insert to lift. Grip both sides of the ashtra y   To empty, lift the cover and pull the
                                             insert a nd pull upwards.                         ashtray out upwards by its c ov er.
 Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to      To enlarge the stora ge c om partment
 injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle        remove the ashtray com pletely.
 passengers should be informed
 according ly .

Ashtray, front 3
O pen the ashtray cover to the resista nce
point.




76
Glove com partm ent                            Stow age compartment 3 for glass es     Coin holder 3
To open, pull hand le upwards.                 On driver’s sid e: Fold down to open.   In the centre console.
O n the inside of the glov e c om partment
                                                                                       Sun visors
cover there is a pen holder.
                                                                                       Use the sun v isor to protect from glare by
In vehicles w ith Infotainment system 3, the                                           pulling it d ow n and swivelling it to the side.
telematics unit 3 can be housed in the
glove compartment.




                                                                                                                                    77
Safety systems   Three-stage safe ty s yste m
                 Comprising:                                        The airbag sy stems 3 serve to
                                                                    supplement the three-p oint sea t belts
                 z three-point seat belts,                          and belt tensioners. The seat belts must
                 z belt tensioners a t the front seats,             therefore always be worn. Disregard of
                                                                    these instructions may lead to injuries or
                 z airbag sy stems for driver’s seat,               endanger life. Vehicle p assengers should
                   passenger seat 3 and outboard rear               be informed accordingly.
                   seats 3.
                 The three stag es are a ctivated in sequence      Thoroughly read the instructions
                 depending on the severity of the acc id ent:      acc om panying the c hild restra int system !
                 z The automa tic seat belt locking devices
                   prevent the belt strap from being pulled
                   out and thus ensure that the v ehicle
                   occupants are retained in their seats.
                 z The front seat b elt buckles are p ulled
                   downwards. As a result, the seat b elts
                   are instantaneously tightened and the
                   occupants are made aware of the
                   deceleration of the vehicle at a v ery ea rly
                   stage. This reduces the stress placed on
                   the body.
                 z The airbag sy stems a re also triggered in
                   the event of severe accidents and form a
                   safety cushion for the occupants.




78
Seat belts                                In the event of an accident, persons not
                                          wearing sea t belts enda ng er their fellow
 Alwa ys wea r your seat belt, and that   oc cup ants and themselves.
 means also in urb an traffic and when
 you are a rear seat passenger. It can    Control indica tor X for the seat belt – see
                                          page 29.
 save y our life!
 Pregnant women m ust alwa ys wear a      Sea t belts are desig ned to be used by only
                                          one person at a time. They are not suitable
 seat belt – see page 82.
                                          for c hildren under 12 yea rs of ag e or
                                          150 cm unless an appropriate child
                                          restra int system is used .
                                          For children up to 12 y ears of age, we
                                          recommend the Vauxhall child restraint
                                          sy stem – see pa ge 95.


                                                                                         Three-point seat belts
                                                                                         The vehicle is equipped with three-point
                                                                                         seat belts with automatic retrac tors and
                                                                                         locking d evices, allowing freedom of body
                                                                                         mov ement although the spring tensioned
                                                                                         belts alway s ensure a snug fit. C orrect seat
                                                                                         position – see pages 64, 82, 85.
                                                                                         The belt has a " vehicle sensitive retra ctor"
                                                                                         which is designed to lock during hea vy
                                                                                         acc eleration or deceleration in any
                                                                                         direction.




                                                                                                                                     79
Belt tens ioners                                                                                  If the seat belts are undama ged the
The front seat belts are equip ped w ith belt                                                     operation thereof is unaffec ted, even if the
tensioners. In the event of a head -on or                                                         belt tensioners hav e b een trigg ered .
rea r-end collision of a certain severity, the                                                    Further information – see page 83.
buckles are pulled downwards, thereby
tightening the belts.




                                                 Actuati on of belt tensioners
                                                 is indicated by illum ina tion of control
                                                 indica tor v – see next page.
                                                 The belt tensioners must be replaced after
                                                 activation. We recommend that you
                                                 consult y our Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer.




80
                                                                                                 z The belt tensioner and airbag sy stem
                                                 Hav e the cause of the fa ult remedied.           control electronics can be found in the
                                                 We recommend that you consult y our               centre console area. In order to av oid
                                                 Vauxhall Authorised R epairer.                    malfunctions, do not store mag netic
                                                                                                   objects in this a rea.
                                                The system’s integ ra ted self-diagnostics
                                                                                                 z We recom mend that you have the front
                                                allow s faults to be quickly remedied. Hav e
                                                                                                   seats removed by a Vauxhall Authorised
                                                your C ar Pass on hand when consulting an
                                                                                                   Repairer.
                                                Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                                                                                 z The belt tensioners only actuate once.
                                                Imp or tant
                                                                                                   Please replace belt tensioners that have
                                                z Do not fit accessories not sp ecifically         been triggered. We recom mend tha t you
                                                  released for y our v ehicle type or store        consult your Vauxhall Authorised
                                                  objec ts in the belt tensioner operating         Repairer.
                                                  area (in the area of the belt tensioners)
                                                                                                 z Applicable safety directives must always
                                                  due to the risk of injury in the event the
                                                                                                   be ob served when disposing of the
Cont rol indica tor v for belt t ensioners        belt tensioners a re triggered.
                                                                                                   vehicle. For this reason, d isposal should
The b elt tensioners are elec tronically        z Do not mak e any modifications to the            be performed by an authorised recycling
monitored together with the airbag                components of the belt tensioners, as            company. We recommend that you
systems. Their operationa l readiness is          this will render the v ehicle unroadw orthy.     consult your Vauxhall Authorised
indicated on the instrument panel b y
                                                                                                   Repairer.
control indica tor v. When the ignition is       Imp roper handling (e. g. removal or
switched on, the control indica tor              installation) could cause the belt
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does    tensioners to be triggered. Risk of injury!
not illum inate, d oes not go off within
4 seconds, or illuminates whilst d riv ing,
there is a fault in the belt tensioner system
or the a irb ag systems – see p age 89. The
belt tensioner or the airbag sy stems may
fail to trigger in the event of an a ccident.




                                                                                                                                           81
Using the belts                                                                                   Height adjustm ent
                                                  O n pregnant women in particular, the
Fitting seat bel ts                                                                               of front seat belt upper a nchorage points:
                                                  lap belt must be positioned as low as
Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide                                                      1. Pull b elt out slig htly.
                                                  possible ac ross the pelv is so as not to put
it across the body , making certain that it is    too much pressure on the abdomen.
not twisted.                                                                                      2. Press belt guide or, in 5-door hatch, push
                                                                                                     button down.
Insert latch plate into buckle. Backrest         Bulk y clothing prevents the belt from fitting
must not be tilted too far back as this          prop erly. The belt must not rest against        3. Set desired height.
would affect the opera tion of the seat          ha rd or fragile objects in the pockets of       4. Allow to loc k audibly into p osition.
belts; recommended tilting a ng le app rox .     your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys,
                                                 spectacles) because these could cause            Do not adjust height while driving .
25°. The lap belt must be straight and lie
snugly against the body . Tighten lap belt       injury. Do not place any objec ts (e.g.
at frequent intervals whilst driving by          ha ndb ags, mobile phones) b etween the
tugging diagonal pa rt of belt.                  belt and your body.




82
                                                                                              Testing the belts
                                                                                              Plea se check all parts of the b elt system
                                                                                              occasionally for dama ge a nd correct
                                                                                              operation. H ave da maged parts replaced .
                                                                                              In ca se of an accident, please replace
                                                                                              overstretc hed belts and triggered belt
                                                                                              tensioners. We recommend that you
                                                                                              consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer.
                                                                                              Do not perform any altera tions on the
                                                                                              belts, their anchorages, the automatic
                                                                                              retrac tors or the belt buck les.
                                                                                              Mak e sure that b elts are not da maged or
                                                                                              trapped by sharp-edged objec ts.


Adjust height such that the belt p asses       Rem oving t he b el t
over the shoulder and rests against the        To remove the belt, d epress the red
shoulder. It must not p ass over the neck or   pushbutton on the buckle; the b elt will
upper arm.                                     retract automatically.
                                               Three-point seat b el t on centre rear sea t
                                               The belt can only be pulled out of the
                                               retractor 3 if the rear seat backrests are
                                               engaged in their retainers – see page 69.




                                                                                                                                       83
                                                                                                 Exception:
                                                                                                 Passenger sea t with seat occupancy
                                                                                                 recognition system 3 . The seat occupancy
                                                                                                 recognition system deactiva tes the front
                                                                                                 and side airbags on the p assenger sid e if
                                                                                                 the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a
                                                                                                 Vauxhall child restraint system with
                                                                                                 transponders 3 has b een fitted to the front
                                                                                                 passenger seat. S eat occupa ncy
                                                                                                 recognition – see p age 89. Vauxhall child
                                                                                                 restraint sy stem with transponders 3 – see
                                                                                                 pag e 96.
                                                                                                 Examples of events triggering the front
                                                                                                 airbag sy stem:
                                                                                                 z Impact against a non-y ielding obstacle:
Vauxhall Full Size airbag s yste m               z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3,               The front airbags are trigg ered at low
Front airb ag                                                                                      vehicle speed.
                                                 z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child
The front airbag system is identified by the       restraint systems y with transponders 3       z Impact against a yield ing obstacle
word AI RBAG on the steering wheel and             in the courtesy light.                          (such as another vehicle): The front
above the glov e c om partment 3.                                                                  airbags are only triggered at a hig her
                                                 The front airb ag system will be trigg ered :
The front airbag system comprises:                                                                 vehicle speed.
                                                 z depending on the severity of the
z an airbag with inflator in the steering          accident,
  wheel and a second one in the
  instrum ent panel 3,                           z depending on the type of impact,
                                                 z within the range shown in the illustration,
z the control elec tronics with impact
  sensor,                                        z indep endently of the side airb ag
                                                   system 3 and curtain airbag system 3.
z the a irba g system s control indicator v in
  the instrument panel.




84
When trigg ered , the front airbags inflate in                                                    The front airbag sy stem will not be
                                                 The front airbag sy stem provides
milliseconds to form a safety cushion for                                                         triggered in the ev ent of
                                                 optimum p rotection when the seat,
the d riv er and front passenger. The                                                             z the ignition is switched off,
                                                 back rest and head restra int are correctly
forward movement of the front seat                                                                z minor frontal collisions,
                                                 adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat
occupants is c hecked, thereby                                                                    z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
                                                 according to the occupant’s height so
sub stantially reducing the risk of injury to                                                     z collisions involving a side or rear impa ct,
                                                 that when the driver is sitting up rig ht, the
the upp er body and hea d.                                                                        that is to say, if it w ould not be of benefit to
                                                 steering wheel is held in the a rea of its       the oc cup ants.
No im pairment of view will occur, because       upper sp ok es with the d riv er’s arms
the a irb ags inflate and deflate so quickly     slightly bent. The pa ssenger seat should
that it is often not ev en noticed in an         be as far back as possible, with the
accident.                                        back rest upright (see pa ges 5, 64, 82).
                                                 Do not place the head, b od y, hands or
                                                 feet on the covers of the airbag sy stems.
                                                 Do not place any objects in the area in
                                                 which the airb ags inflate. Im portant
                                                 inform ation – see page 92.
                                                 The three-point seat belt must be
                                                 correctly fitted – see page 82.




                                                                                                                                                85
 Seat belts must therefore always be
 worn. The front airbag system serves to
 supplement the three-point seat belts. If
 you do not wea r your seat belt you risk
 being seriously injured, or even thrown
 from the vehic le, in the ev ent of an
 accident.
 In the event of an accident the belt helps
 to keep you in the correct seating
 position, so that the front airb ag system
 can provide you with effective
 protection.

In addition, the front airb ag sy stem will not
be triggered for the front passenger in           Side airb ag 3                                  The side airbag sy stem will be triggered:
versions with seat occupancy recognition 3
                                                  The side a irb ag system is identified by the
if                                                                                                z depending on the sev erity of the
                                                  word AIRBAG on the outb oa rd sides of the        accident,
z the front p assenger seat is unoccupied,        front seat backrests.
                                                                                                  z depending on the ty pe of im pact,
z there is a prop erly fitted Va ux ha ll child   The side a irb ag system c om prises:
  restraint system with transponders 3 .                                                          z within the range shown in the illustration
                                                  z an airbag with infla tor in the back of the
  Seat oc cup ancy recognition, see                                                                 on the centre d oor pillar of the driver’s or
                                                    driver’s and front passenger seat
  page 89. Vauxhall child restraint system                                                          front passenger side,
                                                    respectively ,
  with transponders 3 – see page 96.                                                              z ind epend ently of the front airbag
                                                  z the control electronics,                        sy stem.
                                                  z the side impact sensors,                      Exception: Pa ssenger seat with seat
                                                  z the airbag systems c ontrol indicator v in    occupancy recognition system 3. The seat
                                                    the instrum ent panel,                        occupancy recognition sy stem dea ctivates
                                                                                                  the pa ssenger front and sid e airbags if the
                                                  z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3,
                                                                                                  passenger seat is unoccupied or a
                                                  z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child   Vauxhall child restraint system with
                                                    restraint systems y with transponders 3       transponders 3 has been fitted to the
                                                    in the courtesy light.                        passenger seat. S eat occupa ncy
                                                                                                  recognition – see p age 89. Vauxhall child
                                                                                                  restraint sy stem with transponders 3 – see
                                                                                                  pag e 96.


86
                                                 There must be no objects in the area in
                                                 which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea
                                                 between the seat backs and the vehicle
                                                 body . Do not place the hands or arms on
                                                 the covers of the airba g systems.
                                                 Imp ortant information – see page 92.
                                                 The three-p oint seat b elt m ust always b e
                                                 correctly fitted – see page 82.

                                                The side airba gs will not be triggered in the
                                                event of
                                                z the ig nition is sw itc hed off,
                                                z fronta l collisions,
When triggered, the sid e airbag inflates in    z accidents in which the v ehicle overturns,     C ur tain ai rbag 3
milliseconds to form a safety cushion for       z collisions involving a rear impac t,           The curtain a irba g system is identified by
the d riv er or front passenger in the                                                           the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim.
                                                z collisions involving a side imp act outside
respective door area. This substantially
                                                  the passenger cell.                            The curtain a irba g system com prises:
red uces the risk of injury to the upper body
in the event of a sid e-on collision.           In addition, the side airbag system w ill not    z an airbag w ith inflator in the roof frame
                                                be triggered for the front passenger in            on the driver’s and front passenger side
                                                versions with seat occupa ncy recognition 3        respectively,
                                                if                                               z the control electronics,
                                                z the front passenger seat is unoccupied,        z the side im pact sensors,
                                                z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child      z the airb ag system s control indicator v in
                                                  restraint system with transpond ers 3.           the instrument panel.
                                                  Seat occupancy recognition, see
                                                  page 89. Va ux ha ll c hild restraint system
                                                  with transp onders 3 – see p age 96.




                                                                                                                                            87
                                                                                                    There m ust be no objec ts in the area in
                                                                                                    which the airbag inflates. Do not place
                                                                                                    the hands or arms on the covers of the
                                                                                                    airbag sy stems. Important information –
                                                                                                    see page 92.
                                                                                                    The three-point seat belt must alway s be
                                                                                                    correctly fitted – see pag e 82.

                                                                                                   The curtain airbags will not b e triggered in
                                                                                                   the event of
                                                                                                   z the ignition is switched off,
                                                                                                   z frontal collisions,
                                                                                                   z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
The curtain airbag system will be triggered:      When the curtain airbag is triggered it          z collisions involving a rear impact,
                                                  inflates w ithin milliseconds and provides a
z depending on the severity of the                                                                 z collisions involving a side impact outside
                                                  safety barrier in the hea d area on the
  accident,                                                                                          the passenger cell.
                                                  respective side of the vehicle. This reduces
z depending on the typ e of impa ct,              the risk of injury to the head considerably in
z within the range shown in the illustration      case of a side impact.
  on the centre door pillar of the driver’ s or
  front passenger side,
z together with the side airbag sy stem,
z irrespective of seat occupancy
  recognition,
z independently of the front airbag
  system .




88
                                                  Hav e the cause of the fa ult remedied.
                                                  We recommend that you consult y our
                                                  Vauxhall Authorised R epairer.
                                                 The system’s integ ra ted self-diagnostics
                                                 allow s faults to be quickly remedied. Hav e
                                                 your C ar Pass on hand when consulting an
                                                 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                                 Seat occup ancy r ecog ni tion 3
                                                 The seat occupa ncy recognition sy stem
                                                 deactiv ates the front and side passeng er
                                                 airbags if the front passenger seat is
                                                 unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint
                                                 sy stem with transponders 3 has been fitted
                                                 to the front passenger seat. The curtain
Cont rol indica tor v for airb ag systems        airbag system remains activated.                Vehicles with sea t occupancy recognition
The a irb ag systems are monitored                                                               can a lso be identified by a stic ker a t the
                                                 Control indica tor y for seat occupancy
electronic ally together with seat                                                               bottom of the front pa ssenger seat.
                                                 recognition is located in the courtesy light.
occupancy recognition 3 and the belt             If control indicator y illuminates for          Vauxhall child restraint systems with
tensioners. Their opera tional readiness is
                                                 approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is          transponders 3 are automatically
shown b y control ind icator v in the            switched on, the vehicle is equipped with       detected if correctly fitted to the front
instrument panel. When the ignition is
                                                 seat oc cup ancy recognition – see page 90,     passenger seat. When these child restraint
switched on, the control indica tor              Fig. 12097 S .                                  systems are being used on the front
illuminates for approx . 4 seconds. If it does                                                   passenger seat, the front and side airbag
not illum inate, d oes not go out after          If a Vauxhall child restraint system w ith
                                                                                                 systems for the front passenger seat are
4 seconds or illuminates while driving, there    tra nsponders 3 is fitted, control indica tor
                                                                                                 deactivated. The curta in a irb ag system
is a fault in the a irb ag systems, seat         y illuminates with a steady glow once the
                                                                                                 remains a ctivated. Pay a ttention to seat
occupancy recognition 3 or the b elt             ignition has been switched on and the
                                                                                                 occupancy recognition 3 control indica tor
tensioners – see page 81. The system s may       sy stem has detected the seat. Only then
                                                 can the child restraint system on the front
                                                                                                 y – see page 90.
fail to trigger in the event of an a ccident.
                                                 passenger seat b e used.                                                                        6




                                                                                                                                             89
                                              Control i nd icator y for Va uxhall
                                              child restrai nt systems
                                              with t ransponders 3
                                              The presenc e of a Vauxhall c hild restraint
                                              sy stem with transponders 3 is ind ic ated
                                              after the ig nition has been switched on by
                                              permanent illum ination of the c ontrol
                                              indica tor y in the courtesy light, as soon
                                              as the seat occupa ncy recognition sy stem
                                              ha s d etec ted the child restraint sy stem.




                                                                                             If the control indicator d oes not illuminate
 Only Vauxhall child restraint systems                                                       whilst driving, the front and side airbag
 with transp onders 3 can be fitted on the                                                   have not been deactivated on the
 front passenger seat; the use of systems                                                    passenger side. Risk of fatal injury to the
 without transponders poses a danger to                                                      child – fit child restraint system to rear seat.
 life.                                                                                       Hav e c ause of fault remedied. We
Vauxhall child restraint sy stems with                                                       recommend that y ou consult y our Vauxhall
transponders 3 are identified by a sticker.                                                  Authorised Repa irer.
                                                                                             If the child restraint sy stem is fitted
                                                                                             improperly or a tra nsponder is defective,
                                                                                             the control indicator flashes. Check that
                                                                                             the child restraint sy stem is fitted properly .
                                                                                             Fitting a child restraint system with
                                                                                             transponders 3 – see the instructions
                                                                                             acc om panying the c hild restra int system .




90
If the control indicator does not illuminate
with a c orrectly insta lled child restraint       If the Vaux hall child restraint system
system there is a fault – risk of fa ta l injury   with transp onders 3 has been fitted
to the c hild. Fit child restra int system to      according to the instructions, the control
rea r seat. Ha ve cause of fault remedied .        indicator for Va ux ha ll restra int system s
We recommend that you consult y our                with transponders must illuminate in the
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.                      courtesy light when the ignition is
                                                   switched on.
If no Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 is installed the control            If the control indicator does not
indicator must neither illuminate nor flash,       illuminate w hilst driving, the airbag
since the passenger side airb ag systems           systems have not been deactivated on
would not be trigg ered . Have the c ause of       the passenger sid e. Risk of fatal injury. In
fault remedied. We recommend that you              this case, fit child restraint system to rear
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.         seat. Have cause of fault remedied. We
                                                   rec om mend that you consult your
                                                   Vauxhall Authorised R epairer.




                                                                                                   91
Im portant                                       z O nly protective covers whic h are           z Do not perform any alterations on the
                                                   approved for y our C orsa/Combo w ith          components of the airbag sy stem, as this
z Acc essories and other objects must not
                                                   side airb ag may be fitted on the front        would render the vehicle unroadworthy.
  be affixed or placed in the a rea in which
                                                   seats. When fitting the protective covers,
  the airbags inflate a s they could cause
                                                   mak e sure that the airbag units on the       The systems can b e triggered abrup tly
  injury if the airbags are trig gered.
                                                   outboard sides of the front seat              and cause injury if they are ha nd led
z Do not p la ce a ny objects between the          back rests a re not covered.                  improperly.
  airb ag systems and the vehicle
                                                 z The airb ag systems are triggered
  occ upa nts; d ang er of injury .                                                             z We recom mend ha ving the steering
                                                   indep endently of each other depending         wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling
z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to          on the severity of the accident and the        parts, the door sea ls, the handles and
  hang up light articles of clothing or c oa t     type of impa ct. The side airbag system        the seats removed by y our Vauxhall
  hangers. Do not place any objects in the         and the curtain airbag system are              Authorised Repairer.
  pockets of the hanging items – risk of           triggered together.
  injury.                                                                                       z Applicable safety directives must always
                                                 z Each airbag can be trig gered only once.       be ob served when disposing of the
z The airbag system s and belt tensioner           O nc e triggered, an airbag must be            vehicle. For this reason, d isposal should
  control electronics c an be found in the         rep laced without delay. We recomm end         be performed by an authorised recycling
  centre c onsole area. I n ord er to av oid       that you consult your Vauxhall                 company. We recommend that you
  malfunctions, do not store magnetic              Authorised Repairer.                           consult your Vauxhall Authorised
  ob jects in this area.
                                                 z The speeds, d irections of m ov ement and      Repairer.
z Do not stick a ny thing on the steering          deform ation p roperties of the v ehicles,
  wheel, instrument p anel, front seat             and the properties of the obstac le
  backrests or roof fram e in the vicinity of      concerned, determine the severity of the
  the airbags, or on the front pa ssenger          accident and triggering of the airbags.
  seat cushion, or cover any of those areas        The degree of da mage to your vehic le
  with other materials.                            and the resulting repair costs alone are
z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to      not indicative tha t the criteria for
  clean the steering wheel, instrum ent            triggering of the airbags were m et.
  panel, front seat b ackrests, roof fram e
  and seat cushion of the front passenger
  seat. Do not use any a ggressiv e cleaning
  agents.




92
z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should       z When using a Vaux hall child restraint
  only tra vel on the rear seats. This does       system with transponders 3 on the front
  not ap ply to children who are trav elling      passenger seat, in order to prev ent
  in c hild restra int system s w ith             malfunctions, no objects (e.g. plastic
  transponders 3.                                 sheet, stick ers or heated mats) may be
                                                  placed under the child restraint system.
z In vehicles with seat occupancy
  recognition 3, do not plac e any heavy
                                                 C hild restraint system s a s well as other
  ob jects on the front passenger seat           objec ts must never b e carried on the la p
  otherw ise the airba g systems for the
                                                 of passengers; risk of fatal injury. I f
  front p assenger sea t may be trigg ered in    carried in this w ay, c hild restraint
  the ev ent of an acc ident.
                                                 systems with transp onders 3 in vehicles
z In vehicles with seat occupancy                with seat occupancy recog nition 3 could
  recognition 3, to prevent m alfunctions        lead to front passenger airbag sy stems
  do not use protective covers or sea t          not being trig gered in the event of a n
  cushions on the front passenger seat.          accident.
                                                                                               Use of child restra int systems 3 on fr ont
                                                                                               pa ssenger sea t in vehicl es wi th airba g
                                                                                               systems 3 but wi thout sea t occupa ncy
                                                                                               recognit ion 3

                                                                                                Vehic les with front p assenger airbag 3
                                                                                                without side airbag 3: C hild seats fa cing
                                                                                                the rear of the vehicle m ust not be
                                                                                                installed on the front passenger sea t, risk
                                                                                                of fa ta l injury. Child sea ts facing the
                                                                                                direction of trav el (child seats for weig ht
                                                                                                classes I, II and III , following pag es) may
                                                                                                be installed on the front p assenger seat
                                                                                                if the seat has been p ushed back a s far
                                                                                                as it will go and the backrest ha s b een
                                                                                                adjusted such that the lap b elt fits
                                                                                                snugly.

                                                                                                                                                6




                                                                                                                                            93
Vehicles with front passeng er airbag can        A vehicle with side a irba gs can be          Use of child restra int systems 3 on fr ont
be identified by the word AI RBAG above          identified b y the word AIRBAG on the         pa ssenger sea t in vehicl es wi th airba g
the g lov e com partment and the warning         outboard sides of the front seat backrests.   systems 3 and wi th sea t occupa nc y
stic ker on the side of the instrum ent panel,                                                 recognit ion 3
                                                 Sea t occupancy recognition 3 – see
visible when the p assenger door is open.        page 89.                                       Only Vauxhall child restraint systems
 Vehicles with side airbag 3: N o child                                                         with transpond ers 3 ca n be fitted on the
 restraint system 3 ma y be fitted on the                                                       front passenger seats. Use of systems
 front passenger’ s sea t; risk of fatal                                                        without transponders poses a danger to
 injury.                                                                                        life.




94
Vehicles with seat oc cup anc y recog nition    Child restraint system 3                         Not e
can be identified by control indicator y in     The Vauxhall child restraint sy stem is          z Children und er 12 years or under 150 cm
the c ourtesy light. If control ind ic ator y   designed sp ecifically for your Vauxhall and       tall should only trav el in an ap prop ria te
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds w hen the     thus provides optimum safety for y our child       child sa fety sea t.
ignition is switched on, the vehicle is         in the event of impa ct. If a different child    z When transporting c hildren, use the child
equipp ed with seat occupancy rec ognition      safety seat is used, follow the                    restra int system s suitable for the child’s
– see pa ge 89.                                 manufac turers’ instructions for fitting a nd      weight.
Seat occupancy recognition in a vehicle         use.
                                                                                                 z Be sure that c hild restra int system s a re
is also indica ted b y a sticker on the         Selec ting the rig ht system                       properly installed – see the instructions
front passenger seat – see page 94,             Your child should be transported facing            accompanying the child restraint
Fig. 12106 A.                                   rearward in the car as long as possible.           sy stem.
The seat occupancy recognition system           Change the sy stem when the height of the
                                                child is such that the head ex tends over the    z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint
detects Vaux hall child restraint sy stems                                                         sy stem can b e wiped clean.
with transponders 3 and switches off the        top of the system and is no longer
front a nd side airbag systems for the front    supported at eye level. The child ’s neck is     z Do not stick any thing on the child
passenger’s sea t. The curtain airbag           still very weak. In the event of an ac cident,     restra int systems and do not cover them
system rem ains activated. Seat occ upa ncy     they are subjected to less stress in the semi-     with any other m aterials.
recognition – see pa ge 89.                     prone rea rw ard position than when              z Only allow child ren to enter and exit at
                                                up right.
Vauxhall child restraint system s with trans-                                                      the side fa cing away from the traffic.
ponders 3 can be identified by the stick er                                                      z A child restraint sy stem which has been
on the child restraint system.                                                                     subjected to stress in an accident must
                                                                                                   be replaced.




                                                                                                                                              95
Permissible opti ons for fi tting a child safety sea t in your Corsa/Comb o 1)                         B 1 = Provided : No front passenger
                                                                                                             airbag or with seat occupancy
Weight                         On                           On                           On                  recognition and Vauxhall child
and                           fr ont                      a rear                   centre rea r seat         restraint sy stem with transponders.
age cl ass2 )           p assenger sea t              outb oard seat                                         Front pa ssenger seat height
0:                                                                                                           adjustm ent also required : Front
up to 10 kg                                                                                                  passenger seat in highest position
                             B 1, + +                        U+                             U                and slid all the way b ack. Front seat
or approx.
10 months                                                                                                    belt anchorag e point set to lowest
                                                                                                             position.
0+:
up to 13 kg                                                                                            B 2 = Provided : Without side airbag, w ith
                             B 1, + +                        U+                             U                front passenger seat slid all the w ay
or approx.
2 years                                                                                                      back or with seat occupancy
                                                                                                             recognition and Vauxhall child
I:                                                                                                           restraint sy stem with transponders.
9 to 18 k g                                                                                                  Front pa ssenger seat height
                             B 2, + +                        U+                             U
or approx.                                                                                                   adjustm ent also required : Front
8 months to                                                                                                  passenger seat in highest position
4 years                                                                                                      and slid all the way back . Make sure
                                                                                                             that the v ehicle seat belt is as
II :
15 t o 25 kg                                                                                                 stra ig ht as p ossible b etween the
                                B2                           U                              U                shoulder and anchorage point in
or approx.
3 to 7 years                                                                                                 vehic le.
                                                                                                       U = Universally suitable in conjunction
II I:
                                                                                                           with three-point seat belt.
22 t o 36 kg                    B2                           U                              U
or approx.
6 to 12 y ears




1)
     For reas ons o f sa fety, w e recom mend tha t the child sa fety seat be installed o n
     one of th e o uter rear seats.
2)
     We reco mmen d the use of each system u ntil the child reaches the up per weight lim it.


96
+   = Seat with ISO -FIX mounting
      available. When mounting with ISO -
      FI X, only ISO -FI X child restra int
      sy stems that have been approved
      for the vehicle m ay be used. We
      recomm end that y ou consult your
      Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer.
++ = Seat with ISO -FIX mounting
     available for Corsa only; only child
     sa fety system s ap prov ed for the
     vehicle may be used.




                                              Exte rior mirrors                                Sport exterior mirrors 3
                                              For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior      For the safety of pedestrians, the mirrors
                                              mirrors will swing out of their normal           are released from their mountings if they
                                              mounting position if they are bumped.            are bumped with sufficient force.
                                              Reposition the mirror by applying slight         Relocate the d isenga ged m irror housing in
                                              pressure 3.                                      its mountings and engage by applying
                                                                                               pressure.
                                              As pherical ex terior mirror 3
                                              increases the field of view . Estimating the
                                              distance away of vehicles following y ou is
                                              only possible to a limited ex tent b ecause of
                                              slight distortion.




                                                                                                                                         97
                                             He ad res traints                              Safety acce ssorie s 3
                                             Do not a tta ch objects or components that     The wide ra nge of Vauxhall accessories
                                             are not app rov ed for y our Corsa/C ombo to   allows you to equip your C orsa/Combo as
                                             the head restraints, since they c an reduce    y ou d esire. I n addition to safety
                                             the protection provided by the head            acc essories, items for improving comfort
                                             restra ints and could b e cata pulted          and a complete range of vehicle care
                                             uncontrolla bly throug h the vehicle in the    products, there are many articles which will
                                             event of hard braking or an accident.          be of great value to you when needed.
                                             Ac tiv e head restraints – see page 28.        "Genuine Vaux hall Parts a nd Accessories"
                                                                                            guarantee high quality a nd accurate fit.
                                                                                            Y our Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer will be
                                                                                            happy to advise you, for ex ample with
                                                                                            regard to:
                                                                                            z Vauxhall child restra int system s
                                                                                            z Tow ropes
Autom atic anti-dazzle                                                                      z Tow rods
interior mirror 3                                                                           z Jump leads
Dazzle at night is automatically reduced .                                                  z Spare bulb kit
                                                                                            z Spare fuse kit
The m irror d oes not reduce dazzle when:
                                                                                            z Halogen fog lights
z the ignition is switched off,                                                             z Mud flaps
z reverse gear is engaged or the selector                                                   z Magnetic lig ht
  lever is in R,                                                                            z Wa rning triangle
                                                                                            z First-aid kit
z interior lighting has been switched on.                                                   z First-aid kit (cushion)
Setting – see page 7.




98
Lighting                                                Vehicles with d aytime running lights 3:
                                                        With the ignition on and the light switch
                                                        on 7 , dipped beam w ithout instrument
                                                        illumination is on.
                                                        Driving ab road – see pag e 102.

                                                        Turn signals, hazard warning flashe rs
                                                        see page 16.




           Exte rior lights
           Turn light switch:
           7 = O ff
           8 = Parking lights
           9 = Dipp ed b eam, main beam
           Dip ped beam , main b eam and head lig ht
           flash – see p age 15.
           In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights a nd
           numb er plate lights are also on.




                                                                                                    99
                                                Corsa Hatch, C ombi,
                                                z Front sea ts occupied              =    0
                                                z All seats occupied                 =    1
                                                z All seats occupied and
                                                  luggage compa rtm ent load         =    2
                                                z Driver’s seat occupied and
                                                  luggage compa rtm ent load         =    3

                                                Corsav an, C om bo
                                                z Seats occupied                     =    0
                                                z Seats occupied and
                                                  half load in load compartment      =    1
                                                z Seats occupied and
Headlight range adjustm ent ?                     full load in load c om partment    =    2    Fog lights >3
Manual hea dlight range adjustm ent 3           z Driver’s seat occupied and                   On =     Press >, > illuminates
Adjust headlight range to four stages of          full load in load c om partment    =    3             in instrument panel
vehic le load ing with dipped beam switched                                                    O ff =   Press > again or
on: turn ad juster wheel to desired position.   Correct ad justment of the headlight rang e             switch ignition or light off
                                                reduces d azzle for other roa d users.
Correct adjustment of the headlight range
red uces dazzle for other road users.           Automat ic head light range adjustment 3       Fog tail light r
                                                Regulates hea dlight ra nge of vehicles with   On =     Press r, r illuminates
                                                Xenon headlights.                                       in instrument panel
                                                                                               O ff =   Press r again or
                                                                                                        switch ignition or light off
                                                                                               The fog tail light of the vehicle is
                                                                                               deactivated when towing a caravan/
                                                                                               trailer.

                                                                                               Reversing lights
                                                                                               C om e on when reverse gear is engaged
                                                                                               and ig nition is sw itched on.




100
Door-to-door light function                           Courtesy light 0                             Instrument illumination k
Dipped beam comes on for approx.                      Comes on when a door is opened. Once the     C om es on with ex terior driving lights.
30 second s a s d oor-to-door lighting.               door ha s b een shut it goes out after a     Brightness can be adjusted with adjuster
                                                      certain delay 3 or when the ignition is      wheel.
To activate function:
                                                      turned on 3.
1. Switch off ignition.
                                                                                                   Information display illumination 3
                                                      Continuous op eration: Press light switch;
2. Remove ignition key .                                                                           C om es on when the ignition or
                                                      press again to switch off.
3. Open driver’ s d oor.                                                                           infota inm ent system is on. Brightness can
                                                      Automatically regulated centre               be adjusted w ith a djuster w heel.
4. Pull turn sig nal stalk tow ard steering
   wheel.                                             cons ole lighting 3
                                                      Spotlight in housing of interior mirror.
If the driv er’s door is left open, the lights will
go out after tw o minutes.                            Daylight-dependent, automa tic ally
                                                      regulated centre console lig hting with
Door-to-door lighting can be deactivated              ignition switched on.
by inserting the key in the starter switch or
by pulling the turn signal stalk toward the
steering wheel again.




                                                                                                                                           101
                                                                              light beze ls
                                                                              The inside of the light bezels ma y mist
                                                                              briefly when subjected to adverse wet and
                                                                              cold w inter conditions, strong rain or after
                                                                              the vehicle is washed. The m isting will c lear
                                                                              up on its ow n a fter a brief p eriod. This can
                                                                              be facilitated by switching on the lights.

                                                                              Headlights when driving abroad
                                                                              The asy mmetrica l dipped beam increa ses
                                                                              the field of vision on the passenger side of
                                                                              the lane.
                                                                              This causes g la re for oncom ing traffic if the
                                                                              vehicle is driven in countries where traffic
                                                                              drives on the opposite side of the road.
Front reading lights 3       Re ar courtesy light,                            To prevent g la re, hav e the headlights
With ignition switched on:   rear re ading light 3                            adjusted by a work shop or m ount a bezel
                             On                   = Move switch to right      on each headlight. We recom mend that
O n = Press button
O ff = Press button again    Off                  = Move switch to left       y ou contact y our Vauxhall Authorised
                                                                              Repairer.
                             Light switches on
                             when a d oor is
                             op ened              = Switch in middle

                             Luggage com partm ent and
                             loading area lighting 3
                             Comes on when the tailgate is opened.

                             Safeguarding the battery 3
                             Some consumers such as the interior
                             lig hting switch themselves off after approx.
                             30 minutes if the ignition is off in ord er to
                             protect the battery charge.




102
Windows,           C are must be taken w hen operating the
                   electric windows 3 a nd electric sun
sun roof,          roof 3. There is a risk of injury, especially
folding sun roof   for children.
                   Vehicle passeng ers should be inform ed
                   accordingly.
                   K eep a close watch on the windows and
                   sun roof when closing them. Ensure tha t
                   nothing becomes trapped in them a s
                   they move.
                   Before lea ving the v ehicle, remove the
                   ignition key in order to p revent
                   unauthorised operation of the windows
                   and sun roof.
                                                                   Door windows
                                                                   The door w indows can b e operated with a
                                                                   crank.

                                                                   Rear vent windows 3
                                                                   To open    =   Push catch
                                                                   To close   =   Pull k nee lever, eng age




                                                                                                              103
                                               Safety func tion                                 O verload
                                               If the window g lass enc ounters resistanc e     If the windows a re repeatedly operated at
                                               above the midd le of the window during           short intervals, the power sup ply is briefly
                                               autom atic closing, it is im med ia tely         cut off.
                                               stopped and the window opened ag ain.            The system is protec ted by fuses in the fuse
                                               If the windows do not mov e easily (e.g . on     box – see page 194.
                                               account of frost), repeated ly ta p the switch   Fault
                                               for the wind ow in question until the wind ow    If a utomatic opening or closing of the
                                               ha s b een closed in sta ges.                    windows is not possible, activate window
                                                                                                electronics as follows:
                                                                                                1. Close doors.
                                                                                                2. Switch on ignition.
                                                                                                3. Window com pletely open.

Ele ctric windows 3                                                                             4. Close window a nd hold down rocker
                                                                                                   switch for at least another 5 seconds.
O peration with ignition switched on.
                                                                                                5. Repeat for ea ch window.
O perated via tw o roc ker switches in the
driver’s door ha nd le for windows in the
driver’s and front passenger door.
Additional rocker switch in the front
passenger door handle.
Control ind icators in the switches show the
opera tional status.
To opera te window in stages, tap
appropriate switch. For automatic opening
or closing, keep switch pressed for slightly
longer; to stop window movem ent, tap
switch again.




104
                                               To close:                                       To low er:
                                               Turn crank to rig ht.                           Turn crank to left.
                                               When the crank will not turn any further the    The unlocking b utton is autom atically
                                               sun roof has reached the comfort position.      released when the sun roof reaches the
                                               Press unlocking button aga in and continue      closed position.
                                               to turn crank to rig ht until sun roof is       After opera ting the sun roof, alway s return
                                               closed.                                         the crank to the recess.
                                               The unlock ing button is automatically          Sun shad e
                                               relea sed when the sun roof rea ches the        The sun sha de c an be op ened and closed
                                               closed position.                                with the sun roof either closed or raised.
                                               To raise:                                       When the sun roof is opened, the sun sha de
                                               Close sun roof a nd p ress unloc king button.   is also opened.
                                               Turn crank to rig ht.


Sun roof 3
Tilt crank out of rec ess.
To open:
Press unlocking b utton. Turn crank to left.
When the crank will not turn any further the
sun roof ha s reached the comfort position,
and air noise w ill be reduced .
To open beyond the comfort position: Press
unlock ing button a gain. Continue to turn
crank to the left.




                                                                                                                                        105
                                        To op en:                                        To low er:
                                        Press button l ; the sun roof opens to the       Press button l until the sun roof is c losed .
                                        comfort position. Air noise is reduced in this   Sun shad e
                                        position. To stop the m ov ement, press          The sun sha de c an be op ened and closed
                                        button l aga in.                                 with the sun roof either closed or raised.
                                        To op en beyond the comfort p osition:           When the sun roof is opened, the sun sha de
                                        press button l until sun roof is open.           is also opened.
                                        To close:
                                        Press button \ until the sun roof is closed.
                                        To raise:
                                        Close the sun roof and press button \.




Sun roof with electric drive 3
O peration with ignition switched on.
Buttons I and \ between sun visors.




106
                                                                                          Not e
                                                                                          Release switch as soon as roof has rea ched
                                                                                          end position.
                                                                                          Roof ca n only be operated at speeds of less
                                                                                          than 75 mph (120 km/h).
                                                                                          Do not open frozen, icy or snow-covered
                                                                                          roof.
                                                                                          When using a roof rack, check freedom of
                                                                                          mov ement of electric folding roof in order
                                                                                          to prevent d amage.




Fault                                        Electrically ope rated
If the electric drive fails, the system is   folding sun roof 3
protected by a fuse in the fuse box – see    Operation with ig nition switched on.
page 194. Until the fault is remedied,
opera te the sun roof as follows:            Buttons \ and I between the sun visors.
                                             To op en:
Slide drive cover toward rear. Push in
spring-load ed centre pa rt of drive shaft   Press button \ until folding roof is open.
using screwdriver 3 and rotate drive shaft   To close:
until sun roof is closed .                   Press button l until folding sun roof is
                                             closed.




                                                                                                                                  107
Fault                                            Position screwd riv er 3 in v icinity of clamps,   Unscrew b oth screws from drive cover and
If a fault occurs, check relevant fuse in fuse   relea se and remove light insert.                  remove cover in d irection of arrow .
box – see page 194. M anual op eration if
electric drive fails:
Release c ourtesy light lens at side recess
using screwdriver 3 and remove.




108
                                                                                              Not e
                                                                                              Release switch as soon as roof has rea ched
                                                                                              end position.
                                                                                              Roof ca n only be operated at speeds of less
                                                                                              than 75 mph (120 km/h).
                                                                                              Do not open frozen, icy or snow-covered
                                                                                              roof.
                                                                                              When using a roof rack, check freedom of
                                                                                              mov ement of electric folding roof in order
                                                                                              to prevent d amage.




Take the emergency spanner from the            Electrically ope rated
glove compartment, insert it in the drive of   folding sun roof 3, Combo
the folding sun roof and turn until the roof   Operation with ig nition switched on.
is closed.
                                               Buttons I a nd \ between sun v isors.
                                               To op en:
                                               Press button \ until folding roof is open.
                                               To close:
                                               Press button I until folding roof is closed.




                                                                                                                                      109
Fault                                            Remove screw from coupling using       An emergency spanner is attached to the
If a fault occurs, check relevant fuse in fuse   screwdriver 3. Vehicle tools 3 – see   insid e of the cover.
box – see page 194. M anual op eration if        page 184.
electric drive fails:
Unclip drive cover at front and pull off
downward.




110
Place screwdriver part of emergency           Insert hexagon side of emergency spanner
spanner at m ark on side of coupling and      into hex agon socket and turn to close roof.
extract coupling. If coupling cannot be
extracted, insert emergency spanner into
drive and sla cken by turning forwards a nd
back wards.




                                                                                             111
Climate control




                  He ating and ventilation system with             Automatic climate control s yste m 3
                  optional air conditioning system 3               The electronic air conditioning system
                  Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 a re          provides maxim um comfort under any
                  combined into one unit that is d esigned to      weather conditions, at any outside
                  prov ide com fort regardless of the season,      temperature and at a ll tim es of the y ear.
                  weather or outside temperature.                  To ensure a constant and com fortable
                  When cooling 3 is activated, the air is          climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
                  cooled and dried.                                the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the
                                                                   air distribution are changed a utomatically
                  The heating unit heats the air a s required in
                                                                   acc ording to clim atic conditions outside
                  all operating m od es depending on the
                                                                   the vehicle.
                  position of the temperature switch. The air
                  supply can be adjusted to suit                   C lim ate c ontrol system – see page 119.
                  requirements by means of the fan.
                  Buttons for cooling n and recirculation
                  sy stem 4 are only present in versions
                  with op tional a ir conditioning system 3 –
                  see p age 114.




112
Heating and ventilation sys te m          Centre rotary switch: Air flow               Rig ht-hand rot ary swi tch: Air distribut ion
Left -hand rota ry swit ch: Temperature   Four fan speeds:                             V      to the windscreen and
Red zone         =   warm                 x Off                                               front door windows
Blue zone        =   cold                 4   Maximum air flow                         J      to the windscreen, front door
                                          The rate of air flow is determined b y the          windows and
                                          fa n. The fan should therefore a lso be             to foot w ell
                                          switched on during a journey.                K      to foot w ell
                                                                                       L      to head area a nd to foot w ell
                                                                                       M      to head area
                                                                                       O pen the air vents when the switch is set to
                                                                                       L or M.




                                                                                                                                 113
Heate d re ar window 3,                 Air conditioning system 3                     Air rec irculati on system 4
heated exterior mirrors 3               Cooling n                                     Air recirc ulation button 4 is used to
O peration with ignition switched on:   Only operate when the engine is running       switch the air conditioning system to a ir
                                        and the fan is on.                            recirc ulation mode (control indica tor).
On =     Press Ü
                                        On    =    Press n                            If fumes or unpleasa nt od ours penetrate
O ff =   Press Ü again
                                        Off   =    Press n again                      from outside: temporarily switch on air
Control indicator in pushbutton.                                                      recirc ulation system 4.
                                        Control indica tor in p ushbutton.
                                        When cooling (AC compressor) is active, air   The air recirculation sy stem minimises the
                                        is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling or     entry of outside air. The humidity
                                        dehumidification is not desired, switch off   increa ses, and the w indows can mist up.
                                        cooling in order to save fuel.                The quality of the pa ssenger com partment
                                                                                      air d eteriorates w hich m ay ca use vehicle
                                        Cooling switches off automatically at low     occupants to feel drowsy .
                                        outside temperatures.
                                                                                      S witc h the air distribution to V : The air
                                                                                      circulation system is automatically shut off
                                                                                      to prov ide faster d emisting of the windows.




114
Centre and side (1) air ve nts                 To close the vents, p ush the slider towards    Heated se ats 3
Pleasant ventilation to the head area          the centre of the v ehicle.                     Two switches ß in the centre console;
controlled by the position of the              To increase the air supply , set the fan to a   operational for the respectiv e front seat
tem perature switch. Temperature sw itch in    higher sp eed.                                  when the ignition is switched on.
the m id position: Cooler air flows from the                                                   On =     Press ß
centre vents than from the side vents.         Windscre en defroster nozzles (2 )              O ff =   Press ß again
The a ir flow can be directed as desired by    Air distribution switch set to V or J: Air is
                                                                                               C ontrol indicators in the switches.
tilting and swivelling the sla ts.             directed onto the windscreen a nd the d oor
                                               wind ow s.

                                               Additional vents
                                               Located in front of the wind screen, in front
                                               of the door mirrors and in the front foot
                                               wells.




                                                                                                                                        115
                                              He ating
                                              The amount of heat is dependent on the
                                              coolant temperature and is thus not fully
                                              attained until the engine is warm.
                                              For rapid warming of the p assenger
                                              compartment:
                                              z Set the temperature switch in the red
                                                zone.
                                              z Set the fan to speed 3.
                                              z Set the air distribution sw itch to the
                                                desired position – see page 113.
                                              The comfort and general well-b eing of the
                                              vehicle occupants a re to a large extent
                                              dependent on a suitable ventilation and
Ve ntilation                                  heating setting.                               Heating the foot well
z Set temperature switch as desired ,                                                        z Set the temperature switch in the red
                                              To ob tain a stra tification of tem perature     zone.
z Switch fan on at desired setting,           in the vehic le with the pleasant effect of
                                              "cool head and warm feet" , set the air        z Switch on fan.
z For max imum ventilation in head area:
  Set air distribution switch to M and open   distribution switch to K, J or L and the       z Set air distribution switch to K.
  all vents,                                  temperature switch as required.
z For ventila tion to foot well: Set air
  distribution switch to K ,
z For simultaneous v entilation to the
  head area and the foot well: Set air
  distribution switch to L .




116
Demis ting and defrosting                   Operation of the s yste m 3                       Ma xim um cooling
the windows                                 Comfort sett ing                                  (Maximum A ir Conditioning)
                                                                                              O pen w indows and sun roof 3 briefly so
 Disreg ard of these instructions may       z Air rec irculation system 4 off.                that warm air can esca pe rap idly.
 cause the windows to become misted up,     z Set cooling n as desired.                       z Air circulation system 4 on.
 which c an lead to accidents due to lack
 of p roper vision.                         z Set temperature switch a s d esired.            z Cooling n on.
                                            z Sw itch on fan a t desired level of air flow.   z Turn the temp erature switch as far into
z Turn the temperature switch as far into
  the red zone as possib le.                z Set air distribution switch to M or L.            the blue zone (cold) as possible.
                                            z O pen v ents as required.                       z Set fa n to 4.
z Set fan to 3 or 4.
z Set air distribution sw itch to V.        Temperature switch in centre of                   z Set air distribution switch to M.
                                            adjustment range: Warmer a ir will flow into      z Open all vents.
z Activ ate heated rear window Ü.           the foot well a nd cooler air into the upp er
z Direct the side air vents a s required    zone, with warm er air coming from the side
  towa rd s the door windows.               air vents and cooler air from the c entre
                                            vents.
z For simultaneous w arming of the foot
  well, set air distribution switch to J.




                                                                                                                                     117
                                                – or –
                                                if there is still moisture in the system after
                                                previous air c onditioning operation, the
                                                windows may mist up. To prevent this,
                                                set air distribution to K before sta rting
                                                eng ine and set to V approx. 5 sec onds
                                                after starting.
                                               z Activate heated rear window Ü.

                                               Disregard of these instructions m ay
                                               cause the windows to become m isted up,
                                               which can lead to ac cidents due to la ck
                                               of proper vision.


Window dem isting                                                                                Window de-icing
Wind ow m isting e. g. during d amp wea ther                                                     z Cooling n off.
or with dam p clothing:
                                                                                                 z Set temperature switch as desired.
z Cooling n on.
                                                                                                 z Set fa n to desired speed ,
z Set temperature switch as desired .
                                                                                                 z Air distribution switch to V, air
z Switch on fan at desired level of air flow                                                       recirculation sy stem 4 automa tic ally
z Air d istribution switch to V, air                                                               switches off.
  recirculation system 4 switches off                                                            z Open sid e air vents.
  automa tic ally ,
                                                                                                 z Activate heated rear w indow Ü.
                                                                                                 O peration with cooling (AC comp ressor) is
                                                                                                 not possible when outsid e temperatures
                                                                                                 are low.

                                                                                                 Air intake , air outle t, notes,
                                                                                                 maintenance
                                                                                                 see pages 124, 125.




118
Autom atic climate control sys tem 3
The system provides m aximum com fort in
any w eather, at any outside temperature
and during any season.
To ensure a constant and com fortable
climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of
the inflowing air, the air-flow rate a nd the
air distrib ution are cha nged automatically
according to clim atic conditions outside
the v ehicle.




                                                Temperature changes d ue to external            When set to automa tic mode, the c lim ate
                                                influences, such as direct sunlight, are        control sy stem provides the optimal
                                                autom atic ally compensated.                    settings for almost all conditions. If
                                                                                                nec essary , climate control sy stem settings
                                                When cooling (air conditioning
                                                                                                can b e m od ified manually.
                                                compressor) is active, a ir is cooled and
                                                dehumidified.                                   The climate control system is only
                                                                                                operational w hen the engine is running.
                                                When no c ooling or dry ing is required press
                                                the ECO button to sav e fuel – see page 122.    C ooling (air conditioning compressor)
                                                                                                switches off autom atically at low outside
                                                                                                temperatures.




                                                                                                                                          119
                                                Deactivation of the AC compressor (EC O        Pre-select ed tem peratures
                                                appea rs in the disp la y) may restrict the    The preselected tem perature ca n b e set to
                                                level of comfort and safety. S ee page 122.    va lues between 16 °C and 28 °C using the
                                                                                               left-hand rotary knob.
                                                All air vents are actuated autom atically in
                                                autom atic mode. The a ir vents should         For the sake of comfort, only change the
                                                therefore always be open – see page 115.       preselected temperature in sm all steps.
                                                                                               If a temp erature b elow 16 °C is set, LO
                                                                                               app ears in the air conditioning display: The
                                                                                               automatic c lim ate control system runs
                                                                                               consta ntly with maxim um cooling. The
                                                                                               temperature is not regulated.
                                                                                               If a temp erature a bove 28 °C is set, HI
                                                                                               app ears in the air conditioning display: The
                                                                                               automatic c lim ate control system runs
                                                                                               consta ntly with maxim um heating. The
Autom atic m ode
                                                                                               temperature is not regulated.
Basic setting for max imum comfort:
                                                                                               The preset temperature is retained when
z Press AUTO button.
                                                                                               the ignition is switched off.
z Open all air vents.
z Air conditioning compressor activation –
  see pa ge 122.
z Preset tem perature to 22 °C with turn
  knob .
If nec essary , the pre-selected tem perature
can be set higher or low er.




120
Manual sett ings
Under certain circumstances (e. g. iced or
misted wind ow s), the functions of the
climate control sy stem can be modified
manually.
Manual settings are stored when the
ignition is switched off.
Make ma nual settings as follow s w hen
necessary:




                                             Wi nd ow demi st ing and d e-i cing           Heated r ear window ,
                                                                                           heated exter ior mirror s 3
                                              Disregard of these instructions m ay         Heating operational only w ith engine
                                              cause the windows to become m isted up,      running.
                                              which can lead to ac cidents due to la ck
                                              of proper vision.                            Press button Ü, Ü appears in the air
                                                                                           conditioning display .
                                             Press button V, V appears in the air          The rear window a nd ex terior mirrors w ill
                                             conditioning display.                         quickly be cleared of ice and cond ensa tion.
                                             The tem perature, air distrib ution and fan   Heating is switched off a utomatica lly after
                                             are set automatically, windows are quickly    app rox . 15 m inutes. To switch it off before
                                             demisted and de-iced                          that time: Press button Ü again.
                                             To return to autom atic mode:Press button
                                             V or AUTO.




                                                                                                                                     121
Acti vati ng and d eac tiva ting ai r          Air distri bution                             Air flow
condit ioning com pressor                      Press one or more of the following buttons.   S et air flow using the right-hand rotary
Press the ECO button. ECO appears in the       The corresponding sy mbol app ears in the     knob. The selected fan speed is indicated
air conditioning display .                     air conditioning display:                     by the number of bars.
Switch on to save fuel. In this mode cooling   s:   Air distribution to windscreen           To deactivate the fan and thereby the
(AC com pressor) is switc hed off.                  and front side windows.                  climate control sy stem: Turn the right
                                                                                             rotary k nob antic lock wise until the display
Inflowing air is neither cooled nor            M: Air distribution to vehicle occupants
                                                                                             goes out.
dehumid ified. This restricts the level of        via adjustable air vents.
comfort provid ed by the autom atic clima te                                                 To activa te: Turn the rotary know
                                               K: Air distribution to foot w ell.
control sy stem. This may cause the                                                          clockw ise.
windows to mist up, for example.               To return to autom atic mode: Press the
                                                                                             To return to automatic m ode: Press the
                                               appropriate buttons ag ain, or press AUTO.
To return to opera tion with cooling: Press                                                  AUTO button.
the ECO button. EC O d isappears.




122
                                                                                                 Press AUTO with the ignition off. The
                                                                                                 preselected temperature appea rs in the air
                                                                                                 conditioning display. The temperature can
                                                                                                 be a djusted with the left-ha nd rotary knob.
                                                                                                 The air conditioning will operate for a
                                                                                                 limited period of tim e.
                                                                                                 To deactivate air conditioning, press the
                                                                                                 AUTO button.




Air reci rculation syst em                       Air condit ioning wi th the eng ine not
The a ir recirculation sy stem prevents the      runni ng
entry of outside air and the air in the          When the vehicle is stop ped and the
passenger com partment is circulated .           ignition off, the heat or cooling power still
                                                 in the sy stem can b e used to condition the
Press button 4 . % appears in the air
                                                 passenger compa rtm ent, for example
conditioning d isplay .
                                                 when stop ped at a level crossing.
The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
circulation mode. The quality of the
passenger com partment a ir deteriorates
which may cause the vehicle occupants to
feel drowsy. I n op eration without c ooling
the a ir humid ity increases, so the wind ow s
may mist up. C onseq uently , the air
circulation sy stem should only be run for
short periods of tim e.
To switch off a ir recirculation:
Press button 4 again.




                                                                                                                                           123
                                                 Polle n filter                                   Note
                                                 The pollen filter cleans the air entering from   If the windsc reen is misted due to damp
                                                 outside and filters dust, soot, pollen and       weather, temporarily set the system as
                                                 spores from the interior air if the air          desc ribed under "Wind ow dem isting".
                                                 recirculation system 3 is active. The activ e    S ettings – see pages 117, 118.
                                                 carbon lay er 3 eliminates m ost odours a nd     C ooling 3 functions most efficiently when
                                                 ha rm ful a mbient ga ses from the air.          the wind ow s a nd sun roof 3 are closed. If
                                                 Have the pollen filter repla ced a t the         the passenger compa rtm ent has heated
                                                 intervals specified in the Service Booklet.      up considerably after a long period in
                                                                                                  direct sunlight, briefly open the windows
                                                                                                  and sun roof 3 so that the hot air can
                                                                                                  esca pe q uick ly .




Air intake
The air intakes in front of the wind screen on
the far left and right-hand sides of the
engine compartment must be k ept free of
lea ves, d irt and snow.

Air outlet
Do not cover the air outlets when storing
item s in the luggage com partment storage
compartments.




124
When cooling 3 (air c onditioning               Maintenance
compressor) is switched on condensation         In order to ensure consistently good
forms, which is ex pelled from the underside    op eration of the AC compressor 3, it m ust
of the v ehicle.                                be operated several minutes one per
At lea st one air vent must b e open while      month irrespective of the weather or
cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is      season. It is not p ossible to operate the AC
on in order to prevent the evaporator from      compressor 3 when outside temperatures
icing up due to lack of air movement.           are low.
For trouble-free operation of the automatic     If a fault occurs, consult a w ork shop. We
climate control system 3, d o not c ov er the   recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
sensor between the air vents below the          Repairer.
windscreen.




                                                                                                125
Easytronic 3   The semi-automatic Easytronic
               tra nsmission permits manua l (manual
               mode) or a utomatic gear shifting
               (a utomatic mode), both with fully
               autom atic clutch control.

                Disregard of these instructions may lead
                to injuries or endanger life.




                                                           Trans miss ion display
                                                           The current gear or mode is indicated in
                                                           the tra nsmission display.

                                                           Selector level pos itions
                                                           Selector lev er in N
                                                           N eutral.
                                                           The engine c an only be started with the
                                                           lever in p osition N and with the foot brake
                                                           depressed. The transm ission display shows
                                                           "N ". I f the foot brake is not depressed, "N"
                                                           flashes.




126
                                                  In Manual mode the gears can be shifted          Selector lev er in A/M
                                                  manually. The transmission display shows         S witc h between Automatic and Manua l
                                                  the currently engaged gear.                      mode.
                                                  If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic    Selector lev er in R
                                                  will automatically shift to a lower g ear even   Reverse gear. Engage only when the
                                                  in Manua l mode. This prevents the engine        vehicle is stationary . Press the button on
                                                  from stalling.                                   the selector lever a nd select R. The
                                                                                                   transmission displa y will show "R".
                                                  Selec tor lever in + or -
                                                  + Shift to a higher gear.                        If R is selected when the vehicle is in motion,
                                                                                                   "R" flashes in the transmission display and
                                                  -   Shift to a lower gear.                       no gear is engaged.
                                                  If a higher g ear is selected when the
                                                  running speed is too low, or a lower gear        Electronically controlled driving
                                                  when the speed is too high, no shift is          programm es in automatic mode
                                                  effected. This prev ents the engine from         z By m eans of delay ed gear cha nging
Selector l ev er i n cent re p osi tion           running at too low or too high rev s.              (higher engine speed s) following a cold
When the selector lev er is m ov ed from N to     Gears can be skipped by jog ging the               start, the opera ting temperature
the m id position with the foot b ra ke           selector lev er repeatedly at short intervals.     programme quickly and automatically
depressed, Easytronic is in Automatic                                                                bring s the catalytic conv erter to the
mode and first gear is engaged. The               When the vehicle is in Automatic mode,             temperature required for optimum
transm ission display shows "A" . When the        Easytronic shifts to Manual mode when the          pollutant reduction.
foot brak e is released, the vehicle b egins to   selector lever is set to position + or - . The
                                                  tra nsmission display shows the currently        z Adaptive programmes autom atically
"creep" . If the foot b ra ke is not depressed,
                                                  selected gear.                                     adapt gear shifting to suit the d riv ing
"A" fla shes. Press the accelerator ped al
                                                                                                     cond itions, suc h as if the vehic le is
direc tly to drive away or return the selector                                                       tow ing a carav an/trailer, ha s a hig h
lev er to N and repeat the process with the
                                                                                                     payload, or is being driv en on inclines.
foot brake dep ressed.
In automatic mode, the transmission shifts
into other gears a utomatica lly based on
driving conditions.




                                                                                                                                              127
                                                                                               Engine braking assistance from
                                                                                               motor
                                                                                               Autom atic mode:
                                                                                               When driving d ow nhill, Ea sytronic does not
                                                                                               shift into higher g ears until a fairly high
                                                                                               eng ine speed has been rea ched. When
                                                                                               brak ing, Easytronic shifts down in good
                                                                                               time.
                                                                                               Ma nua l mode:
                                                                                               To utilise the engine braking effect, selec t a
                                                                                               lower gear in good time when driving
                                                                                               downhill.




Winter programm e T                             Kickdown
In the event of diffic ulties starting off on   Ac celera tor pedal pressed past the
slip pery roa ds, press button T ("A" and       pressure point: Below certain speeds, the
"T " are shown in the transmission displa y).   tra nsmission shifts down into a lower gear.
Ea sy tronic switches to Automatic mode         Full engine power is a vailable for
and the vehicle sets off in second gea r.       acceleration.
The w inter program is switched off by :        During kickdown no manual gear shifting is
z pressing button T a gain,                     possible.
z switching to Manual mode,                     When the engine speed approaches its
z turning off the ignition.                     up per limit, the transm ission shifts to a
In order to protect the Easytronic the winter   higher gea r during kickdown even in
programme automatically sw itches itself        Manua l mode.
off at extremely high clutch temperatures.      Without kickdown this automatic shift is
                                                not effected in Manual mode.




128
Stopping the vehicle                              Vehicle storage                                   Rocking the car
When the selector lev er is in the centre         Before leaving the vehicle:                       If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
position and the vehic le is stationary , first   z eng age hand brake,                             to free it from sand, m ud , snow or a hole,
gear is autom atically engaged (second            z rem ove ignition key.                           mov e the selector lever between the mid
gear if the Winter programme is activated)                                                          position a nd R in a repea t pattern while
                                                  The last gea r engaged is retained. When
and the clutc h is open.                                                                            simultaneously applying light p ressure to
                                                  the selector lever is in position N no gea r is
                                                                                                    the accelerator ped al. Do not race the
If a warning signal sound s w hen the             engaged.
                                                                                                    eng ine and av oid sudd en acceleration.
driver’s door is opened (foot brak e not          When the ignition is switched off the
depressed), m ov e the selector lever to N                                                          This applies only to the ex ceptional
                                                  Easytronic no longer responds to
and ap ply the ha nd brake.                                                                         circumstances mentioned above.
                                                  movem ent of the selector lev er.
When stop ping on gradients, eng age the          If the ignition key is not removed, the
hand brake or depress the bra ke pedal. To        battery m ay be discharged if the vehicle is
prevent overheating of the clutch, do not         then left to stand for a lengthy period of
increase engine speed to ensure smooth            tim e.
idling when in gear.
                                                  If the hand b ra ke has not been applied , the
Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy     control indicator R flashes for a few
period, e. g. in traffic jams or at level         second s a fter the ignition is switched off.
crossings.




                                                                                                                                            129
                                                                                            Interruption of powe r s upply
                                                                                            The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle
                                                                                            battery is d ischarged and a gea r has been
                                                                                            selected. The vehicle c annot m ov e.
                                                                                            If the battery is fla t, sta rt the vehicle using
                                                                                            jump leads – see pa ge 176.




Manoeuvring the vehicle                    Fault
To manoeuv re the vehicle back and forth   If a fault occurs in Easytronic , control
during attem pts to park or in garage      indica tor A illuminates. In the ev ent of
entrances the creeping movement can be     serious faults, an "F" also appears in the
utilised by releasing the foot brake.      tra nsmission display.
Never actuate a ccelerator and brake       It is possible to continue driving if only
pedals simultaneously.                     control indicator A illum inates. Manual
                                           mode can then no longer be selected.
To prevent dam age, Ea sytronic
disengages the "creep function" when the   If an "F" is also shown in the transmission
tem perature of the automatic clutch is    display , it is not possible to continue
high.                                      driving.
                                           Have the ca use of the fault rem edied. We
                                           recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
                                           Authorised Repairer. The system’s
                                           integrated self-diag nostics a llows faults to
                                           be q uick ly remedied.




130
                                                   3. C lean Easy tronic around the cap (see        Towing the vehic le and starting the eng ine
                                                      figure) so that no dirt can get into the      is not perm itted when the clutch has been
                                                      opening w hen the ca p is removed.            released in this way , although the vehicle
                                                                                                    can b e m ov ed a short distance.
                                                   4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by
                                                      lifting upwards – see figure.                 C onsult a workshop immediately . We
                                                                                                    recommend your Vaux hall Authorised
                                                   5. Turn the a djusting screw clockwise using
                                                                                                    Repairer.
                                                      a flat-head screwdriver (v ehicle tools 3 –
                                                      see page 184) until clear resistance can
                                                      be felt. The clutch has now been
                                                      disengaged.
                                                     Do not turn beyond the resista nce, since
                                                     this can damag e the Easytronic.
                                                   6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap m ust be
                                                      in full conta ct with the housing.
If the c ause of the interruption to the p ow er
sup ply is not the discharged battery ,
consult a workshop. We rec om mend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If the vehicle
has to be removed from m ov ing traffic,
release clutch as follows:
1. Ap ply hand brak e and switch off
   ig nition.
2. Open bonnet and engage support.




                                                                                                                                            131
Automatic        After sta rting the engine and before
                 shifting into a gea r, depress the brake
transmission 3   pedal. If the brake peda l is released when
                 a gea r is eng aged , the vehicle will "c reep ".
                 Nev er depress the ac celera tor and brake
                 pedals simultaneously .

                  Failure to follow the description can lead
                  to injuries or endanger life.

                 Once D has been selected, the economy
                 driving p rogra mme is operative. Position D
                 is g enerally ideal for d riv ing.
                 If the accelerator peda l is depressed gently
                 and ev enly the transmission w ill shift into
                 the fuel-saving gears at an early stage. The
                 drive ra nge needs be changed manually              Trans miss ion display
                 only in exceptional c ases. Select 3, 2 a nd 1      The current selector lever position is shown
                 only when automatic shifting up is to be            in the tra nsmission display in the
                 avoided or if additional use is to be made          tachometer.
                 of the engine braking effect.
                 Select D ag ain as soon as driving
                 conditions perm it.




132
                                                To engage P or R pull release under             Drive ranges D, 3, 2, 1
                                                selector lever.                                 D      Position for normal d riv ing
                                                The engine can only be started with lever in           conditions in 1st to 4th gear.
                                                position P or N. When position N is selected,   3, 2, 1 Transmission does not shift ab ov e
                                                press foot brak e or engage hand brake                  the selected g ear.
                                                before starting.
                                                Do not a ccelerate d uring the selection        To select 3 or 1 pull ha ndle beneath
                                                proc edure.                                     selector lever.
                                                                                                After the engine has been started and D
                                                                                                selected, the economy driving programme
                                                                                                is alway s operative.




Sele ctor lever in P, R and N
P   Park. Front wheels lock ed. Engage
    only when vehicle is stationary and
    hand brake is applied.
R   Reverse gear. Engage only when
    vehic le is stationary .
N   Neutra l.

The selector lever can only be moved from
P when the ignition is switched on and the
foot brake dep ressed (selec tor lever lock).




                                                                                                                                        133
                                            z Automatic neutral shift function
                                              automatically sets the transmission to N
                                              to reduc e fuel consumption, e.g. at
                                              traffic lights.
                                              The automa tic neutral shift is activated
                                              if:
                                              –   the selec tor lever is in D, 3, 2 or 1
                                                  a nd
                                              –   the foot brake is op erated
                                                  a nd
                                              –   the vehicle is sta tionary
                                                  a nd
                                              –   the accelerator is not operated.
                                              As soon as the brake is released and the
                                              accelerator pedal is depressed, the
Ele ctronically controlled driving                                                         Winte r program me T
                                              vehicle starts off in the usual m anner.
programme s                                                                                In the ev ent of sta rting-off difficulties on
z Sporty programm e: Tra nsmission shifts   z By mea ns of delayed gear changing           slippery roads press button T , which can
  at high engine speeds:                      (higher eng ine speeds) following a cold     be opera ted in P, R, N , D and 3 (T
  Ta p button S (1 illuminates in the         start, the operating tem perature            illuminates in transm ission display ). The
  transmission display).                      programm e quickly and automatically         vehicle starts off in third gear.
                                              brings the ca ta ly tic converter to the
z Economy p rogram me: Transmission                                                        The winter program is switched off b y:
                                              temperature required for op tim um
  shifts a t lower engine speeds:             pollutant reduction.                         z pressing b utton T again,
  Ta p button S again.                                                                     z shifting to 2 or 1 m anua lly ,
                                            z Adaptive programm es automatically           z turning off the ignition.
z Winter prog ra m: Press T button.           adap t gea r shifting to suit the driving
                                                                                           The winter programme automatically
                                              conditions, such as if the v ehicle is
                                              towing a c aravan/trailer, has a high        switched off a t speeds in excess of app rox .
                                                                                           50 mph (80 km/h).
                                              pay loa d, or is being driven on inclines.
                                                                                           The winter programme automatically
                                                                                           switches off at extremely high transmission
                                                                                           oil temperatures in order to prev ent
                                                                                           dam age.




134
Kickdown                                         Rocking the car                               Manoeuvring the vehicle
Accelerator pedal pressed past the               If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle   To ma noeuv re the vehicle back and forth
pressure point: below certa in speeds, the       to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,    during attempts to park or in ga ra ge
transm ission shifts down into a lower gear.     move the selector lever from D to R in a      entrances, the v ehicle’ s creeping
Full engine power is availab le for              repeat pattern w hile sim ultaneously         mov ement can be utilised by releasing the
acceleration.                                    applying light pressure to the accelerator    brak e pedal.
                                                 pedal. Do not race the engine and av oid      N ever actuate accelerator and brake
Engine braking                                   sudden acceleration.                          pedals sim ultaneously.
In order to utilise the engine braking effect    This applies only to the exceptional
when driving downhill, select d riv e range 3,   circum stances mentioned a bove.
2 or, if necessary, 1 in good time.
The braking action is most effective in driv e
range 1. If drive range 1 is selected at too
high a speed, the transm ission remains in
second gear until the shift p oint for first
gear is reached, e.g. as a result of
deceleration.




                                                                                                                                      135
Stopping the vehicle                                                                             The tra nsmission no longer shifts
The selector lever can be left in the chosen                                                     automatically. Continued driv ing is
gear with the engine running.                                                                    possible. S econd gear is not available.
                                                                                                 Forward gears 1, 3 and 4 must be shifted
When stopping on gradients engage hand                                                           ma nually using selector lever:
brake or depress brake ped al. To prevent
overheating of the transmission, do not                                                          1      =   1st gear
increase engine revolutions to ensure                                                            2      =   3rd gear
smooth id ling while standing if a gear has                                                      3, D   =   4th gear
been selected.
                                                                                                 Hav e the cause of the fa ult remedied. We
Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy                                                    recommend that y ou consult y our Vauxhall
period, e. g. in traffic jams or at level                                                        Authorised Repa irer.
crossings.
Before leav ing the vehicle, apply hand
brake, then place selector lever in position
P and remove ignition k ey.                     Fault
If the ignition key is not rem oved, the        Control indica tor A illuminates after the
battery may be d ischarged if the vehicle is    ignition is switched on. If it does not go out
then left to stand for a lengthy period of      after the start or illuminates while driving,
time.                                           there is a fa ult in the automatic
The ignition key ca n only be remov ed when     tra nsmission or eng ine electronics.
the selector lev er is in position P.




136
                                                                                                Re-selecting P locks the selector lever
                                                                                                aga in. Have cause of power sup ply
                                                                                                interruption remedied . We recommend
                                                                                                that you consult y our Vauxhall Authorised
                                                                                                Repairer.




Interruption of power supply                      3. Push ca tc h forward with a screwdriv er
If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector         and m ove selector lev er out of P.
lev er ca nnot be moved out of position P.        4. Mount cov er back on c entre console and
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using      refit.
jump leads – see pag e 176.
If the battery is not the cause of the fault,
release selector lev er:
1. Ap ply hand brak e.
2. Disenga ge the cover from the centre
   console a nd rota te it clockw ise 90°.




                                                                                                                                       137
Driving hints   The firs t 6 00 m ile s (100 0 km)
                Driv e y our v ehicle at various speed s. Do
                                                                  Driving in mountainous terrain or
                                                                  with a trailer/caravan
                not use full throttle. Never allow the engine     The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
                to labour at low rev s.                           cooling power is therefore independent of
                                                                  the engine speed.
                Make good use of all gears. Depress the
                accelerator ped al a ma ximum of around           S ince a c onsiderab le am ount of heat is
                three quarters of the available p edal travel     generated at high engine speeds and less
                in all gea rs.                                    at slower speeds, do not shift down when
                                                                  climb ing hills whilst the vehic le is still coping
                Do not d riv e faster than three quarters of
                                                                  with the gradient in the hig her gear.
                maximum speed .
                                                                  Diesel engines: On gradients of 10 % or
                Do not b rake unnec essarily ha rd for the
                                                                  more, do not drive faster than 20 mph (30
                first 125 miles (200 km).
                                                                  km /h) in first g ear or 30 mph (50 km/h) in
                                                                  second g ear.
                Never coast with engine not running
                Many units w ill not function in this situation
                                                                  Driving with a roof load
                (e.g. brake servo unit, power steering 3 ).
                                                                  Do not exceed the perm issible roof load –
                Driv ing in this ma nner is a danger to
                                                                  see page 240. For reasons of safety,
                yourself and others.
                                                                  distribute the loa d ev enly a nd secure it
                                                                  properly with reta ining straps so that it
                Brake servo unit
                                                                  cannot slip. Adjust ty re pressure to the load
                When the engine is not running, the brake
                                                                  conditions. Do not d riv e fa ster than 75 mph
                servo unit is no longer effective once the        (120 km /h). Check and retighten the straps
                brake peda l has been depressed once or
                                                                  freq uently .
                twice. Braking effect is not reduced , but
                significantly greater force is required for
                                                                  Switching off the e ngine
                braking.
                                                                  When y ou switch off, fans in the eng ine
                Electric power steering 3                         compa rtm ent may continue running for a
                                                                  time to cool the engine.
                If the power-assisted steering fails when
                being towed w ith the eng ine switched off –      If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.
                the vehicle can still be steered, but             after driving in mountainous terrain: Allow
                considera bly more forc e is req uired.           the engine to id le for approx im ately two
                                                                  minutes in order to prevent heat
                                                                  acc um ulation.




138
Vehi cles w ith turb ocharged engine            Engine s pe ed                                   Clutch operation
After running at hig h engine speeds or high    Driv e in a low engine speed range for each      Alway s d epress the c lutch pedal hard to
engine loa ds, operate the engine briefly at    gear a s m uc h as possible.                     the floor to p revent shifting difficulties and
a low load or run in neutra l for approx.                                                        transmission damage.
30 second s before switc hing off in order to   Warming up                                       When driving do not use the pedal as a
protect the turbocha rger.                      Allow the engine to warm up while driving.       foot rest; this will cause substantial clutch
                                                Do not warm it up by letting it run at idling    wear.
Save energy – more mileage                      speed. Do not apply full throttle until the
Please observe the running-in hints on the      engine has reached op erating                    Cooling fan
previous pag e and the tips for sav ing         temperature.
energy on the following pa ges.                                                                  The cooling fan is controlled v ia a
                                                After a cold start, the automatic                therm oswitch and therefore only runs if
Good, technica lly correct and economical       tra nsmission 3 a nd Easytronic 3 do not         nec essary .
driving ensures ma ximum durability and         shift into higher gears until higher engine
performance for your vehic le.                  speeds have been reached. This allow s the       P edals
                                                catalytic converter to quickly reac h the        Do not place any ob jects in the foot well
Overrun                                         temperature required for optimum                 which could slip under the ped als and
The fuel supply is autom atically shut off      pollutant reduction.                             inhibit the pedal trav el.
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is
being driven down long gradients or when                                                         To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,
                                                Correct gear sele ction
                                                                                                 there must be no mats in the area of the
braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to       Do not race your engine whilst in neutral or
take effect, do not acc elerate during                                                           pedals.
                                                with a low gea r selected. Driving too fast in
overrun and, if in manual transm ission         indiv idua l gea rs as well as stop-a nd -g o
mode, do not de-clutch. To prevent                                                               Battery care
                                                tra ffic increases engine wear a nd fuel
dam age to the cata ly tic converter, overrun                                                    When driving slowly or when the v ehicle is
                                                consumption.
cut-off is temp orarily deactivated when the                                                     stationary , e.g. in slow urban traffic, stop-
cataly tic conv erter temperature is high.                                                       and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all
                                                Change down
                                                                                                 unnecessary electrical load s w here
Vehi cles w ith turb ocharged engine            When decreasing speed, shift down into           possible (e. g. heated rear window, heated
Flow -g enerated noises may be aud ible if      the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch     front seats, etc. ).
the a ccelerator is released quickly on         with a high-revving engine. This is
account of air flow in the turbocharger.        especially important when hill climb ing.        Declutch w hen sta rting in order to relieve
                                                                                                 the strain on the starter and the ba ttery.




                                                                                                                                            139
Saving fuel,                                   New painting techniques employ wa ter as
                                               a solv ent.
                                                                                                Warming up
                                                                                                z Full throttle and w arming up at idle
protecting the                                 End-of-life ve hicle recovery
                                                                                                  speed increase w ear, fuel consumption,
                                                                                                  ex haust em ission, the am ount of
environment                                    Information on end-of-life vehicle recovery
                                               centres and the recy cling of end-of-life
                                                                                                  pollutant in the exhaust and the am ount
                                                                                                  of noise.
                                               vehicles is availab le at ww w.vauxhall.co. uk
                                                                                                z Driv e off imm ediately after starting.
                                                                                                  Wa rm up the engine b y running it at
                                               Energy and e nvironment-conscious
                                                                                                  moderate eng ine speeds.
                                               driving
                                               z High noise levels and exhaust em issions       Uniform speed
                                                 are often a result of driving w ithout due
                                                                                                z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel
                                                 attention to saving energy and
                                                                                                  consumption, the ex haust emissions, the
                                                 protecting the environment.
                                                                                                  proportion of pollutant in the exhaust
                                               z Y ou should therefore drive with energy in       gas and the noise level.
Trend-setting technology                         mind – "more mileage with less fuel" .
                                                                                                z Do not accelerate a nd brake
When dev eloping and manufac turing your         Reduce the noise level and exhaust               unnecessarily . Drive at uniform speed,
vehic le, Vauxhall used environment-             emissions b y adopting an environment-           watching the road.
friendly and in the m ain recyc la ble           consc ious driving style. This is ex tremely
                                                                                                  Avoid frequent starting off and stopping
materials. The production methods used to        worthwhile and im proves the quality of
                                                                                                  e.g . at traffic lights, in short distance
mak e y our v ehicle are likewise                life.
                                                                                                  tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans
env ironmenta lly -compatible.                   Fuel consum ption d epend s to a great           of clever planning . Select road s w ith
Recycling of production wastes keeps the         extent on your own personal d riv ing            good traffic flow .
circulation of material closed. Reduction of     style. The following hints are intended to
energy a nd water requirements a lso help s      help you consume fuel at a rate that is as     Idling
to conserve natural resources.                   close as possible to the specified levels –    z The eng ine also consumes fuel when
                                                 see page 237.                                    idling .
A highly adv anced design mea ns that your
vehic le can be easily disassembled at the       C heck y our v ehicle’ s fuel consumption      z If you have to wait for more than one
end of its working life, and the individual      every time you refuel. This facilitates          minute, it is worthwhile switching off the
materials separated for subsequent re-use.       early detection of any irregula rities           engine. Fiv e m inutes of idling
                                                 causing increased fuel consumption.              corresponds to ap prox imately one
Materia ls such as asbestos and cadmium
are not used . The refrigerant in the air                                                         kilometre of driving.
conditioning system 3 is C FC -free.




140
Overrun                                         z Slightly relea sing the accelerator ped al    Repair and maintenance
z The fuel supply is automatically shut off       results in distinct fuel savings with no      z Improper repairs or adjustm ent and
  during ov errun, e. g. when the vehicle is      major loss of speed.                            maintenance work can increase fuel
  being driven down long gradients or             Drive at no more tha n around three             consumption. Do not carry out w ork on
  when braking – see page 139.                    quarters of max imum speed and you will         the eng ine yourself.
z To enable the overrun cut-off to come           use up to 50 % less fuel, without losing a      You may out of ignorance infringe
  into action and sav e fuel, do not              great deal of time.                             environmental law s b y not disposing of
  accelerate or d eclutch during overrun.                                                         materials properly.
                                                Tyre pre ssure
                                                                                                  Appropriate parts might not b e recycled.
Corre ct gear selection                         z Inadequate ty re p ressure, leading to
z High revs increase engine w ear and fuel        higher road resistance, costs m oney in         Contact with some of the materia ls
  consumption.                                    two wa ys: For m ore fuel and increased         inv olv ed may p ose a hea lth haz ard.
                                                  tyre wear.
z Do not race your engine. Avoid d riv ing at                                                   z We recom mend that repair and
  high engine speeds.                           z Regular checks (every 14 d ays) pay off.        maintenance be entrusted to your
                                                                                                  Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
  Making use of the tachom eter helps to        Electrical loads
  save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed                                                        Extre me driving conditions
                                                z The power consum ption of electrical
  ra nge for each gear as much a s possible
                                                  equip ment increa ses fuel consumption.       z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving
  with uniform engine speeds. Drive as                                                            on poor road s a nd winter driving a ll
  often as possible in top gear, select the     z Sw itch off all aux iliary electrical loads
                                                                                                  increase fuel consumption.
  next higher gear a s soon as possible,          (e. g. air c onditioning 3, heated rear
  and only chang e down when the engine           window) when not needed.                        Fuel consumption increa ses dramatically
  is no longer running perfectly smoothly .                                                       in urba n tra ffic a nd at winter
                                                Roof racks, ski-holders                           temperatures, especially on short trip s
High speed                                      z Due to air resistance, a roof load can          when the engine operating tempera ture
z The higher the speed , the higher the           increase fuel consump tion by approx.           is not reached.
  consumption and the noise level. At top         3.5 gal/1000 m iles (1 l/100 km ).            z Follow the hints given above to keep
  speed, you consume a great deal of fuel       z Remove them if they are not being used.         consumption to a m inimum under suc h
  and produce excessive noise and                                                                 cond itions.
  exhaust em issions.




                                                                                                                                            141
Fuel consumption,   Fuel consumption
                    Fuel consumption is determined under
                                                                    Fuel for pe trol engine s
                                                                    C om mercially availab le high-quality
fuel, refuelling    specific driving conditions – see page 237.     fuels are suitable (catalytic conv erter –
                                                                    see page 145, oc ta ne numbers – see
                    Special equipm ent increases the weight of
                                                                    pag es 234, 235). Fuel quality has a d ecisive
                    the vehicle. As a result, they c an inc rease
                                                                    influence on the power output, running
                    fuel consumption and reduce the specified
                                                                    behaviour and service life of the engine.
                    maximum speed .
                                                                    The ad ditiv es conta ined in the fuel play an
                    There is increa sed friction b etween eng ine   important role in this reg ard. Y ou should
                    and transmission p arts during the first        therefore only use high-quality fuels
                    600 miles (1000 kilometres). This increases     containing additives.
                    fuel consumption.
                                                                    Fuel with too low an octane number can
                                                                    cause pink ing. Va ux hall cannot be held
                                                                    liable for resulting damage.
                                                                    Petrol with a hig her octane number can
                                                                    alway s be used .
                                                                    Pump nozzles for leaded fuel ca nnot be
                                                                    inserted into the filler nec k of vehicles tha t
                                                                    operate on unlead ed fuel.
                                                                    The ignition timing ad justs autom atic ally
                                                                    to the grade of fuel used (octane number)
                                                                    – see pages 234, 235.
                                                                    Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95
                                                                    will ensure economical driv ing.




142
Fuel for diesel engine s                         Fuel filler cap
Diesel engines must be operated only on          If replacing the fuel filler c ap, be sure to use
commercially ava ila ble diesel fuel meeting     a genuine Vauxhall fuel filler cap for y our
the specific ations of DIN EN 590. Do not        model to ensure full functionality . Diesel-
use ma rine diesel oils, heating oils or         engined vehicles hav e special fuel filler
entirely or partially plant-b ased diesel        caps.
fuels, such as rape seed oil or b io diesel,
Aquazole and sim ilar diesel-w ater
emulsions.
The flow a nd filterability of diesel fuel are
tem perature-d epend ent.
Diesel fuels with improved low-
tem perature properties are therefore
ava ilab le on the market during the winter
months. Make sure that you fill the tank
with winter fuel before the start of the cold                                                        Refuelling
weather season.
                                                                                                      Care must b e taken when handling fuel.
Additives can be used with d iesel fuels with
                                                                                                      Before refuelling, switch off the eng ine
winter p roperties that are guaranteed by
                                                                                                      and any external heaters with
the m anufacturer and when using diesel
                                                                                                      combustion chamb ers (identified b y a
fuel filters that are heated depending on
                                                                                                      sticker on the tank fla p). Switch off
the outside temperature.
                                                                                                      mobile phones.

                                                                                                                                                  6




                                                                                                                                              143
                                                                                                  C orrect filling depends to a large extent on
 Fuel is flamm able and ex plosive.                                                               proper operation of the fuel disp ensing
 Therefore, avoid naked flames and                                                                pump:
 sparks when ha nd ling or in the vicinity of
 fuel. Do not smoke! This also applies in                                                         1. Fully insert the pump nozz le and switch it
                                                                                                     on.
 places where fuel c an only be detected
 by its characteristic smell. If you can                                                          2. After the automatic cut-off, the nominal
 smell fuel in the vehicle, have the c ause                                                          capacity of the fuel tank can be
 thereof rem edied imm ediately. We                                                                  obtained by topping up with two d oses
 recommend that you consult y our                                                                    of fuel. Mak e sure the noz zle is fully
 Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer.                                                                      inserted.
                                                                                                  To c lose, place fuel filler cap in position and
                                                                                                  turn, overcom ing the resistance until the
                                                                                                  ratchet on the cap engages audibly. Lock
                                                                                                  the fuel filler cap with the ignition key 3.
                                                Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle.   C lose fuel tank cov er.
                                                On Corsas equipped with a central locking         Wipe off a ny ov erflowing fuel immediately .
                                                sy stem 3, the tank flap is unlocked
                                                tog ether with the doors – see page 54.
                                                Open the tank flap . To prevent dam age,
                                                the right-hand sliding door cannot be fully
                                                op ened if the tank flap is op en.
                                                To unloc k the fuel filler cap, unlock with the
                                                ignition key 3 , unscrew and susp end from
                                                tank flap.
                                                The fuel tank has a limiting sy stem which
                                                prevents ov erfilling of the tank.




144
Catalytic converter,                                                      Dama ge to the catalytic conv erter or the
                                                                          vehicle m ay result if the following points
exhaust gases                                                             are not observed :
                                                                          z Consult a work shop, such as your
                                                                            Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quic kly
                                                                            as possible in the event of misfiring,
                                                                            irregular engine running following a cold
                                                                            start, a significant loss of engine power
                                                                            or other unusual malfunctions which
                                                                            may indica te a fa ult in the ignition
                                                                            sy stem. If necessary, d riv ing may be
                                                                            continued for a short time at a low speed
                                                                            and with a low engine speed.
                                                                            Irregular engine running a nd a loss of
                                                                            engine power when the Traction Control
                       Catalytic converter for petrol                       sy stem 3 or the Electronic Stability
                       engines                                              Program 3 com e into action are
                       Leaded fuel will da mage the cata ly tic             determined b y the op erating conditions
                       conv erter and parts of the electronic               and are therefore of no significance – see
                       sy stem, rend ering them inoperative.                pages 150, 151.
                       Use of high-qua lity fuels other than those                                                      6
                       specified on p age 142 (e.g. LR P1 )) could
                       damage the catalytic converter.
                       On vehicles with a c atalytic converter, the
                       fuel ta nk filler nec k is of a narrow design so
                       that a dispensing pump for leaded fuel
                       cannot b e inserted .




                       1)
                            LR P = Lead Rep la cement Petrol.


                                                                                                                   145
z If unburned fuel enters the catalytic        z If the em ission c ontrol indicator Z         Catalytic converter for dies el engine s
  conv erter, this may result in overheating     flashes, slow down until the flashing         Dama ge to the catalytic conv erter or the
  and irreparable d amage to the cata ly tic     stop s and the control indicator is steady.   vehicle m ay result if the following points
  conv erter.                                    C ontact a workshop im med iately. We         are not observed :
                                                 rec om mend your Vaux hall Authorised
  You should therefore avoid                                                                   z Consult a work shop, such as your
                                                 Repairer. Emission control indicator Z –
  unnecessarily long use of the starter                                                          Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quic kly
                                                 see page 147.
  when sta rting off, running the tank dry                                                       as possible in the event of irregular
  (an irregular fuel sup ply will lead to                                                        engine running, a significant loss of
  ov erheating) and starting the eng ine by                                                      engine power or other unusual
  pushing or towing.                                                                             malfunctions. If necessary , driving m ay
                                                                                                 be continued for a short time at a low
                                                                                                 speed and with a low engine speed.
                                                                                                 Irregular engine running a nd a loss of
                                                                                                 engine power when the Traction Control
                                                                                                 sy stem 3 or the Electronic Stability
                                                                                                 Program 3 come into action are
                                                                                                 determined b y the op erating conditions
                                                                                                 and are therefore of no significance – see
                                                                                                 pages 150, 151.




146
                                                                                                 Flashing with the engine running indica tes
                                                                                                 a fa ult that m ay da mage the cata ly tic
                                                                                                 converter. Y ou can continue to drive
                                                                                                 without causing dam age by slowing down
                                                                                                 until the flashing stops and the control
                                                                                                 indicator is steady. Consult a workshop
                                                                                                 imm ediately. We recomm end y our
                                                                                                 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




Controlling exhaust emission                     Control i nd icator Z for exhaust
Through design-related measures – mainly         Illum inates when the ignition is switched on
in the area of the fuel-injection and ignition   and during the start attem pt. Goes off
systems – the proportion of noxious              shortly after the eng ine sta rts running.
materials in the ex haust, such as carbon        If it illum ina tes while the engine running
monoxide (CO ), hydrocarbons (HC) and            there is a fa ult in the em ission control
nitrog en oxides (N Ox ), is reduced to a        sy stem. The permitted emission v alues may
minimum.                                         be exceed ed. Consult a work shop
                                                 immed iately. We recommend your
                                                 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




                                                                                                                                        147
                                                If it illum ina tes briefly , but does not recur, it   Exhaust gases
                                                is of no significa nce.
                                                                                                        Engine ex ha ust gases contain poisonous
                                                If it flashes after the ignition is switched on,        carbon monoxide, which is colourless
                                                there is a fa ult in the immobiliser system.            and odourless a nd could be fa tal if
                                                The engine cannot be started. See                       inhaled.
                                                page 51.
                                                                                                        If ex haust fumes p enetrate the v ehicle
                                                                                                        interior, open the w indows and consult a
                                                                                                        workshop im mediately. We rec om mend
                                                                                                        your Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer.

                                                                                                       During the first drive sm ok e m ay develop
                                                                                                       because of wax and oil ev aporating on the
                                                                                                       exhaust system . Park the vehicle in the
                                                                                                       open for a while a fter the first drive and
                                                                                                       av oid inhaling the fum es.
Cont rol indica tor A for engi ne
electronics
Illuminates for a few seconds when ig nition
is sw itched on.
If the light comes on when the engine is
running, there is a fa ult in the engine or
transm ission elec tronics. The elec tronics
switch to the emergency running
programme, fuel consumption may
increase and the driveability of the v ehicle
may be affected. In some cases the fault
can be elim inated by sw itc hing the engine
off and back on again. I f the control
indicator illumina tes again when the
engine is running, consult a workshop to
have the cause of the fault elim inated. We
recom mend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.




148
Mainte nance                                      You are thereby mak ing an important
Hav e all maintenance work carried out at         contribution towa rd s keep ing the air clean
the interva ls specified by Vauxhall. We rec-     and compliance with em issions legislation.
ommend tha t y ou entrust this work to your       Check ing and adjustm ent of the fuel-
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who has             injection and ignition system s is p art of the
proper equipment and trained personnel            scope of inspection. For this rea son you
ava ilab le. Electronic testing systems p ermit   should have all maintenance work c arried
rapid d ia gnosis and rem edy of fa ults. This    out at the interv als specified in your Service
way you can be certain tha t all compo-           Book let.
nents of the vehicle’s electrical, injection
and ignition sy stems operate correctly ,
that your vehicle has a low level of pollut-
ant emission and that the catalytic con-
verter system will have a long service life.




                                                                                                    149
Drive control systems   Traction Control system (TC P lus ) 3
                        The TC Pl us prev ents the driving wheels from
                        spinning, irrespective of the road
                        conditions and tyre grip.
                        The system m onitors the rotational sp eed
                        of all wheels. As soon as at lea st one
                        driving wheel sta rts to spin, the engine
                        output is reduced (the sound of the engine
                        cha ng es) and the spinning wheel is b ra ked.
                        This improves the vehicle’s directional
                        control and d riv ing power, particularly on
                        snow and ic e as well as on wet or slippery
                        road s.
                        TC P lu s is ready for operation as soon a s the
                        ignition is switc hed on and the control
                        indica tor v goes out.                             C ont rol indic ator v
                                                                           Illuminates for a few seconds when the
                        When the   TCP lu s   c om es into action, v       ignition is switched on. The system is now
                        flashes.                                           ready for operation.
                        The vehic le is now in a critical situation;       Flashing during driving
                        TC P lu s a llows y ou to keep control of the      This shows the system has com e into
                        vehicle and remind s y ou to match your            action. The engine output may be reduced
                        speed to the road c onditions.                     (the sound of the eng ine changes) and the
                                                                           vehicle m ay be brak ed a utoma tica lly to a
                         Do not let this special safety fea ture           small degree.
                         tempt you into ta king risks when d riv ing.
                         Traffic safety c an only be achieved by
                         adopting a responsible driving style.




150
Illuminates while driving                      Electric Stability Program (E SP Plus) 3             The vehicle is now in a critical situa tion;
Fault in the system: Driv ing can continue.    Whenever necessary, EPSP lu s improves               ESP Pl us a llows y ou to k eep control of the
Spinning drive wheels can cause driv ing       driving sta bility in any d riv ing situation        vehicle a nd reminds you to m atch your
stability to worsen unless driving sty le is   regardless of roa d conditions and tyre grip.        speed to the road conditions.
adap ted, depending on acceleration and        It also prevents the drive wheels from
road surfa ce.                                 spinning regardless of road cond itions and           Do not let this special safety feature
                                               tyre g rip .                                          tempt y ou into taking risks when driving.
Hav e the cause of the fault remed ied. We
recom mend tha t you consult your Vauxhall     The system m onitors vehicle movements.               Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by
Authorised Repairer. The system ’s             As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve               adopting a responsible d riv ing sty le.
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to   (understeers/oversteers) engine output is
be quickly remedied.                           reduced (the sound of the engine cha ng es)                                                           6
                                               and individual wheels are specifically
                                               braked . This considerab ly improves the
                                               driving stability of the vehicle on snow and
                                               ice and on wet or slippery road surfa ces.
                                               ESP P lu s is read y for op eration as soon as the
                                               ignition is switc hed on and c ontrol
                                               indica tor v goes out.
                                               When the ESP Pl us comes into action, v
                                               flashes.




                                                                                                                                                 151
                                                Illum inates while driving                       Illuminates after interruption of power
                                                Fault in the sy stem. Driving ca n be            supply
                                                continued. Poor road surface conditions          e.g. after disconnecting battery .
                                                may however still cause vehicle stability to     After a power supply interrup tion the
                                                be im paired.                                    steering angle sensor must be calibrated to
                                                Have the ca use of the fault rem edied. We       ma ke the system operational:
                                                recommend that you consult your Vauxhall         z Automatic calibration driving in stright
                                                Authorised Repairer. The system’s                  line at constant slow 15 to 25 mph (20 to
                                                integrated self-diag nostics a llows faults to     40 km /h) speed on lev el, dry road.
                                                be q uick ly remedied.
                                                                                                 z Manual calibration by turning steering
                                                                                                   wheel from limit position to limit position.
                                                                                                 If the indicator light does not go off after
                                                                                                 successful calibration, observ e notes in
                                                                                                 midd le column.
Cont rol indica tor v
Illuminates for a few seconds when ig nition
is switched on. Once it goes out, the sy stem
is ready for operation.
Flashing during driving
This shows the system has com e into
action. The engine output may be reduced
(the sound of the engine cha nges) a nd the
vehic le ma y be braked automatically to a
small degree.




152
Cruis e control 3                                                                              I nc rea se
Cruise control can store and maintain                                                          With cruise control a ctiv e, hold down
speeds from approx. 20 to 125 mph (30 to                                                       button I or tap it repeated ly: The speed is
200 km /h).                                                                                    increa sed continuously or in steps of
                                                                                               1.2 mph (2 km /h) without using the
For safety reasons the cruise control                                                          acc elerator pedal.
cannot be activated until the foot brake
has been operated once.                                                                        The current speed is stored and sa ved after
                                                                                               the I button has been released.
The c ruise c ontrol is operated with the
buttons I , R and O on the turn signal lever.
Do not use the c ruise control if it is not
adv isable to maintain a c onstant sp eed
(e. g. in situations presenting a danger to
yourself and other road users, in heavy
traffic or on winding , slippery or greasy
roads).                                           To activ ate
With autom atic transmission, it is a dvisa ble   Ta p button I: The current speed is stored
to switch on the cruise control only when         and maintained. The acc elera tor p edal
drive range D is engaged.                         can be released.
When the cruise control is active, reaction       Vehicle speed ca n be increased by
times may be increased due to the different       depressing the a ccelerator peda l. When
position of the feet.                             the accelerator pedal is released, the
                                                  previously stored speed is resumed.
 Disreg ard of these instructions may lead
 to injuries or end ang er life.




                                                                                                                                        153
Decel era te                                   To dea ctiv ate                             Resuming t he stored speed
With cruise control activ e, hold down         Ta p button O: The cruise control is        Tap button R at a speed a bove 20 mph
button R or tap it repeatedly: The sp eed is   switched off. The v ehicle slowly           (30 km/h): The speed selected before the
red uced continuously or in steps.             decelerates. To continue driving, depress   cruise control w as switched off is resumed.
                                               the accelerator pedal in the usual way .
The current speed is stored and sav ed after                                               The stored speed is cleared once the
the R button has been released .               For reasons of safety, c ruise control      ignition ha s b een switched off.
                                               deactiv ates under certain driving
                                               conditions.
                                               For example:
                                               z the vehicle’s speed drops below
                                                 approx . 20 mph (30 k m/h) or
                                               z the brake peda l is depressed or
                                               z the clutch p edal is depressed or
                                               z the selector lever of v ehicles with
                                                 automatic transmission is set to N.




154
Parking Distance Sens or 3                                                                   Fitti ng rear load racks 3
Parkpilot mak es rev erse pa rking easier by                                                 Rear load rack s, e. g. bicy cle ra cks, fitted
measuring the distance between the rear                                                      nea r the sensors could disrupt the system .
of the v ehicle and an obstacle through                                                      Fault
ultrasonic reflection and warning you with                                                   In the ev ent of a system fault, a continuous
an acoustic sig nal in the passenger                                                         acoustic signal is sounded at a dista nce of
compartment.                                                                                 one metre from the obstacle. Hav e the
The system record s the distance using four                                                  cause of the fault remedied . We
sensors in the rear bumper.                                                                  recommend that y ou consult y our Vauxhall
                                                                                             Authorised Repa irer.
To act ivat e
When the ig nition is on, the Parking                                                        In order to avoid operationa l problems or
Dista nce Sensor switches on automatically                                                   erroneous information, the sensors m ust be
when reverse gea r is engaged. Its                                                           undamag ed a nd free of soiling, snow and
opera tional readiness is indicated by a                                                     ice.
brief acoustic signal.
If the vehicle slowly gets close to an          Under certain circumstances, v arious
obstacle w hile rev ersing, an intermittent     reflective surfaces on objects or clothing
acoustic signal is audible in the passenger     as well as ex ternal noise sources may
compartment when the vehicle tail is less       cause the system to fail to d etec t
than one m etre from the obstacle. The          obstacles in the rear. For this reason,
interval between the signals becomes            care must be taken when reversing even
shorter as the distance is reduced. If the      if the Pa rk ing Distance Sensor is
distance is less than 30 c m, a continuous      opera tional. This is of particular
signa l is aud ible.                            importance when in the vicinity of
                                                pedestrians.

                                               To dea ctiv ate
                                               The system d eactiva tes autom atically
                                               when rev erse g ear is disengaged.




                                                                                                                                        155
Brakes   Brake system
         The brakes are a n important factor for
                                                            Hav e w orn b ra ke p ads replaced. We
                                                            recommend that y ou consult y our Vauxhall
         tra ffic safety .                                  Authorised Repa irer, who will fit pa ds that
                                                            have been tested and a pproved by
         To improve effectiveness, do not brake             Vauxhall and guarantee optim um braking
         unnec essarily hard for the first 200 k m a fter   power.
         new brak e pa ds ha ve been fitted.
                                                            Brake pad s w orn to their minimum
         Brake pad wear must not ex ceed a                  thickness generate a grinding noise.
         specified lim it. Reg ular maintenance as          C ontinued driving p ossible. Have the brak e
         detailed in the S ervice Booklet is therefore      pad s replaced as soon as possib le by a
         of the utmost im porta nce for traffic sa fety.    workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
                                                            Authorised Repa irer.




156
                                              Foot b rake                                          When the engine is not running, the
                                              The foot brake comp rises two independent            support of the brak e servo unit disap pears
                                              brake circuits.                                      once the brake pedal has been depressed
                                                                                                   once or twice. Braking effect is not
                                              If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can still be
                                                                                                   reduc ed, but braking requires signific antly
                                              braked using the other brake circuit. If this
                                                                                                   greater force. This is especially im portant
                                              oc curs, however, the brak e pedal m ust be
                                                                                                   to bear in mind w hen towing .
                                              depressed quite far using considerable
                                              force before braking effect occurs. The              C heck the brake lights before starting out
                                              distance required for braking will b e               on a journey.
                                              greater. Consult a workshop before                   S hortly a fter sta rting each journey the
                                              continuing your journey. We recomm end               effectiveness of the brake sy stem should
                                              your Vaux hall Authorised Repairer.                  be tested at low speed a nd without
                                              To ensure the full pedal travel can be               inconveniencing other traffic, especially if
                                              utilized, esp ecially in c ase of a fault in one     the brakes are wet, e.g. a fter the v ehicle
                                              of the brake circuits, there must be no mats         has been washed.
Brak e assist                                 in the vicinity of the peda ls – see p age 138.      The brake fluid level should be checked
When the brake peda l is q uick ly and                                                             regula rly . If the brake fluid level is too low
forcefully depressed, the vehicle is
                                                                                                   and the ha nd brake is not applied, control
automatically braked with ma ximum b ra ke                                                         indicator R on the instrum ent panel
force a mplification in order to obtain the
                                                                                                   illuminates – see p age 32.
shortest possib le brak ing distance during
full-on bra king (brake assist).
Maintain steady pressure on the brak e
pedal for as long as full-on brak ing is to
continue. When the brake ped al is
released, the max imum brak e force
amp lification is taken away.




                                                                                                                                               157
                                                                                                       ABS u
                                                                                                       The Anti-lock Brak e S ystem (ABS )
                                                                                                       continuously monitors the vehicle’s brake
                                                                                                       system and prev ents the wheels from
                                                                                                       locking regardless of the road condition
                                                                                                       and ty re grip.
                                                                                                       It starts to regulate the braking pressure as
                                                                                                       soon a s a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
                                                                                                       The vehicle rema ins steerable, even in the
                                                                                                       event of v ery heavy braking, for insta nce
                                                                                                       on bends or when swerving to a void an
                                                                                                       obstacle. Ev en in the c ase of full-on
                                                                                                       brak ing, the ABS mak es it possible to drive
                                                                                                       round an obstacle w ithout releasing the
                                                                                                       brak es.
Hand brak e                                        Brake system c ontrol indic ator R                  ABS control is mad e ap parent thoug h a
Always apply hand brake firm ly. On slopes         The control indica tor illuminates w hen the        pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of
apply the hand brake as firmly as possible.        ignition is switc hed on if the ha nd brake is      the regulation process.
                                                   applied or if the brake or clutc h fluid level is
The m echanical hand b ra ke a cts on the
                                                   too low. Brake fluid – see page 222.
brakes on the rea r wheels. It engag es
automatically when applied.
                                                    If the control indicator illuminates when
To relea se the ha nd b ra ke pull the lev er up    the hand brake is not ap plied: Stop.
slig htly , press the ratchet knob, a nd fully      Interrupt y our journey immediately.
lower the lev er.                                   C onsult a workshop. We recommend
                                                    your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




158
For optimum b ra king, keep the brak e                                                           If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels m ay
pedal fully depressed throughout the                                                             be sub ject to locking due to braking tha t
braking process, despite the fac t tha t                                                         is heavier than normal. The a dvantages
the p edal is pulsating. Do not reduce the                                                       of AB S are no longer opera tional. The
pressure on the pedal.                                                                           vehicle can no longer b e steered and
                                                                                                 may swerve.
Do not let this special safety feature
tempt you into taking risk s when driving.
                                                                                                Y ou can continue driving, provided y ou
Traffic safety can only be achieved by                                                          drive with care and anticipation.
adopting a responsib le driving style.
                                                                                                Hav e the cause of the fa ult remedied. We
                                                                                                recommend that y ou consult y our Vauxhall
                                                                                                Authorised Repa irer. The sy stem’s
                                                                                                integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
                                                                                                be quickly remedied .
                                             Control i nd icator u for ABS
                                             The control indicator illuminates for several
                                             second s w hen the ignition is switched on
                                             and the system undergoes a self-c heck at
                                             the same time (m ay be audible). The
                                             sy stem is ready for operation when the
                                             control indicator goes out.
                                             If the control indicator does not go out
                                             after a few sec onds, or if it illuminates while
                                             driving, there is a fault in the ABS . The
                                             brake sy stem rem ains operational without
                                             AB S reg ulation.




                                                                                                                                         159
Wheels, tyres   Tyre s
                See pag e 249 for suitable ty res and
                                                                 Fitti ng new tyr es
                                                                 Fit tyres in pa irs or in sets, which is even
                restrictions.                                    better. Ensure tha t tyres on one axle are
                                                                 z the same siz e
                Ty res fitted in the factory are adapted to      z the same design
                the chassis and provid e optimum driving         z the same make
                comfort and sa fety.                             z and have the same tread pattern.

                Changing tyre /whee l type                       Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the
                Before switching to different tyres or           direction of trav el. The rolling direction is
                wheels, seek advice on the technical             indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on
                possibilities. We recommend that you             the sidewall.
                consult y our Va ux ha ll Authorised Repairer,   Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction
                who will be able to advise y ou of any           (such as when changing a ty re) should b e
                necessary mod ifications.                        refitted as soon as possible. This is the only
                If tyres of a different size than those fitted   way to benefit fully from the d esign
                at the factory are used, the electronic          properties of the tyre.
                speedom eter may require reprogramming
                                                                  We recommend that you hav e your ty res
                to ensure that the correct sp eed is
                                                                  chang ed b y y our Vauxhall Authorised
                display ed.
                                                                  Repairer, who will b e familiar w ith the
                 Use of unsuitab le tyres or wheels m ay          requirem ents of the law a s regards
                 lead to accidents and render the vehicle         disposal of tyres and can thus help to
                 unroa dworthy .                                  protect the environment and your
                                                                  health.




160
Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge
for alloy wheels to protect against
dam age. If wheel trim is used on steel
wheels with bead ed-edge tyres, c om ply
with the following:
z Use of wheel trims and tyres that are
  approved by Vauxhall and fulfil all
  requirements for the wheel and tyre
  com bination.
z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not
  Vauxhall-approved, the tyres m ust not
  hav e a bea ded edge.

 Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims
 could lead to sudden loss of air and
 thereby accidents.                           Tyre pre ssure                                    Incorrect inflation pressures will impair
                                              Check tyre pressures, inc luding the spare        safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel
                                              wheel, at least every 14 days and prior to        econom y and w ill increase tyre wear.
                                              any long journey; the tyres should be             Pressure that is too low can result in
                                              checked when cold. Don’t forget to check          consid erable tyre warm-up and interna l
                                              the spare.                                        dam age, lead ing to tread separation and
                                              Use the valv e cap key to m ake unscrewing        even to ty re blow-out at high speeds.
                                              the valve ca ps easier. The k ey is located on    Hidd en tyre dama ge is not elim inated by
                                              the inside of the ta nk flap.                     adjusting the tyre pressure.
                                              Ty re p ressure – see page 249 and the
                                              adhesive foil on the inside of the tank flap.      Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a
                                              Have adhesive foil replaced after changing         fla t tyre.
                                              to different tyre size.
                                              Do not reduce ty re pressure when the tyres
                                              are wa rm. O therwise the pressure may
                                              drop b elow the perm issible minimum when
                                              the tyres cool down.
                                              After having chec ked the tyre pressure,
                                              tig hten the va lv e ca ps using the v alve cap
                                              key .


                                                                                                                                           161
                                                 Check tyres regularly for dama ge (foreign
                                                 bodies, punctures, cuts, crack s, bulg es in
                                                 sidewalls). Chec k wheels for damage. In
                                                 the event of dam age or abnorm al wear,
                                                 consult a workshop. We recommend your
                                                 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

                                                  Dama ge m ay lead to ty re blow-out.




Tyre condition, wheel condition                                                                 Tread d ep th
Drive over edges slowly and at a rig ht                                                         C heck tread depth regularly.
angle if p ossible. Driving ov er sha rp edges                                                  S hould the front tyres show greater wear
can lead to hidden ty re damage a nd wheel                                                      than the rear ty res, have b oth front wheels
dam age which is only noticed later on.                                                         exchanged with the rear wheels so that the
When pa rk ing, ensure that the tyres a re not                                                  tyres with deeper tread a re on the front
pressed against the ed ge of the kerb .                                                         ax le.
                                                                                                C orrect tyre pressure.
                                                                                                For reasons of safety , tyres should be
                                                                                                replaced when their tread depth has worn
                                                                                                down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).




162
                                               General i nformati on                           Tyre d esigna tions
                                                                                               Meaning s:
                                               z The danger of aq uap laning is greater if
                                                 the ty res are worn.                          e.g. 155/80 R 13 79 T
                                               z Tyres age, even if they a re used only very   155 = Tyre width in mm
                                                 little or not at all. A spare wheel which     80 = Aspect ratio
                                                 has not b een used for six years should be          (ty re height to tyre width in %)
                                                 used only in emergencies; drive slowly        R   = Belt ty pe: Radial
                                                 when using suc h ty res.                      13 = Wheel d ia meter in inches
                                                                                               79 = Load ind ex
                                               z Never fit used tyres the prev ious history
                                                                                                     e. g.: 79 corresponds to 437 kg
                                                 and use of w hich y ou do not know.
                                                                                               T   = Speed cod e
                                               z So as not to im pair brake cooling , use
                                                                                               S peed code letters:
                                                 only wheel trims app rov ed for use on
                                                 your vehicle.                                 Q   Up   to 100   mph   (160   km /h)
                                                                                               S   Up   to 112   mph   (180   km /h)
The legally permissible minimum tread                                                          T   Up   to 118   mph   (190   km /h)
depth (1.6 m m) has been reached when                                                          H   Up   to 130   mph   (210   km /h)
the tread has worn down as far as one of                                                       V   Up   to 150   mph   (240   km /h)
the w ear indicators (TWI 1 )). A number of                                                    W   Up   to 168   mph   (270   km /h)
wear indicators a re spaced at equal
intervals around the ty re within the tread.
Their position is indicated by markings on
the ty re sidewall.




1)
     TWI = T rea d Wea r Ind ica to r.


                                                                                                                                         163
Winter tyre s 3                                                                                        Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into
For notes on fitting new tyres – see                                                                   contact with parts of the cha in and be
page 160.                                                                                              dam aged . Remove the wheel trim – see
                                                                                                       pag e 185.
See page 249 for restric tions.
                                                                                                       Tyre cha ins may only be used at sp eeds up
Winter tyres (M+ S tyres) im prove safety at                                                           to 30 mph (50 km/h) and, when trav elling
tem peratures below 7 °C and should                                                                    on roads that are free of snow , they m ay be
therefore be fitted on all the wheels.                                                                 used for brief periods only since they are
The d esign of summ er tyres mea ns they                                                               subject to rap id wea r on a hard road a nd
have limited qualities for winter driving.                                                             ma y sna p.
If the maxim um perm issible speed for the                                                             Tempora ry spar e w heel 3
winter ty res is less than that of the vehicle,                                                        Tyre chains must not be used on the
a notice ind icating the ma ximum                                                                      temporary spare wheel. If y ou need to use
permissible speed for the tyres must be                                                                tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre,
affixed within the driver’s field of v ision 1).                                                       fit the temporary spa re on the rear ax le
Use of a spa re wheel fitted with a sum mer            Tyre chains 3                                   and transfer one of the rea r wheels to the
                                                       See pag e 249 for restrictions.                 front axle.
tyre may affect the vehicle’s driveability,
especially on slippery road surfaces.                  Ty re chains are only p ermitted on the front   Wheel changing – see pag e 185.
O btain a replacem ent for the faulty tyre as          wheels. They must be fitted to the tyres        C orrect tyre pressure – see pa ge 249.
soon a s possib le, and have the wheel                 sy mmetrically in order to a chieve a
balanced and fitted to the v ehicle.                   concentric fit.
                                                       Alw ays use fine mesh chains that add no
Whee l trims 3
                                                       more than 15 m m to the ty re tread and the
If the wheel trims and tyres used are not              inboard sides (including chain lock).
Vauxhall-approved , mak e sure that the
tyres d o not hav e a bea ded edge. S ee               We rec om mend that you consult your
page 161.                                              Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




1)
     Va ries fro m country to country o n account of
     nationa l regula tions .


164
Roof racks,            Disregard of these notes can lead to
                                                                      Towing e quipme nt 3
                                                                      Use only towing equipment that has been
                       injuries whic h may be fatal. Vehicle
caravan and trailer    passengers should be informed
                                                                      app rov ed for your v ehicle. We recommend
                                                                      entrusting the retrofitting of towing
towing                 accordingly.                                   equipment to y our Vauxhall Authorised
                                                                      Repairer, who will advise you on any
                      Roof racks 3                                    possible towed load increa ses. Your
                      For reasons of safety and to avoid              Vauxhall Authorised Repairer has
                      damaging the roof, we recommend that            instructions on how to install the towing
                      you use the Vauxhall roof rack system           equipment and make any necessary
                      approved for your vehicle. C onsult your        changes to the vehicle that affec t the
                      Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.                   cooling system, heat shields or other
                      Disenga ge c ov ers concealing roof rack        equipment.
                      mounts by pushing sliders in direc tion of      Retrofitting of towing equipm ent is not
                      arrow (e.g. with coin) and remove. To close     possible for vehicles with Pa rk ing Distance
                      roof rack mounts, insert covers at front a nd   S ensor.
                      engage slid ers at rear.
                                                                       The coupling ball b ar is to be removed
                      Fasten the roof ra ck follow ing the
                                                                       when not towing.
                      instructions that accompa ny the system .
                      Driv ing hints – see pa ge 138.                 For installation dimensions of the trailer
                                                                      towing equipment – see pages 257, 258.




                                                                                                               165
Towing equipment with rem ovable                  Fit ting the coupl ing bal l bar             Tensioning coupling ball bar: Hold sa fety
coupling ball bar 3 , Corsa                       Remove the sealing plug from the hole for    slider 1 at top a nd b ottom, pull ba ckwards
Stow age of coupl ing bal l bar                   the coupling ball ba r and stow it away in   as far as possible and hold. Push release
The c oupling ba ll bar is fastened benea th      the luggage compartment.                     lever 2 to the left.
the sp are wheel in a b ag next to the vehic le
tools.




166
Insert coupling ball b ar into housing of   Pull coupling ball bar to chec k that it is      Press red button. Put on protective cap and
coupling using a little pressure until it   engaged.                                         eng age.
audibly engages.                            If coupling ball bar is correctly enga ged
                                                                                                                                      6
                                            z the red field on release lever 2 will not be
                                              visible,
                                            z and release lever 2 can be pushed no
                                              more than 5 mm toward the coupling
                                              ball b ar.
                                            Repeat procedure if coupling ba ll ba r does
                                            not engage.




                                                                                                                                    167
                                             Imp or tant
                                             Tra iler operation is only permitted if
                                             z coupling ball b ar is correctly engaged ,
                                             z and protec tiv e cap has been put on and
                                               eng aged.

                                              Towing a c aravan/trailer is only
                                              permitted w ith a properly attached
                                              coupling b all bar. If the coup ling ball bar
                                              cannot be properly attached, consult a
                                              workshop . We recommend your
                                              Vauxhall Authorised R epairer.



Red button must spring up when safety                                                         Eye for break -awa y stopp ing cab le
cap engages. Check that protectiv e cap is                                                    For carava ns/trailers with brake, attach the
firmly sea ted.                                                                               break-away stopp ing cable to the eye to
                                                                                              the rig ht of the coupling ball bar – see
                                                                                              arrow in figure.




168
Dismounting the coupling b all ba r           Get hold of the top and bottom of the             Replace protective cap onto coupling ball
Press red b utton and p ull p rotective cap   retaining slider 1, pull bac k as far as          bar:
off.                                          possible a nd hold. Push the release lever 2      z Get hold of top and bottom of retaining
                                              to the left and pull the coupling ball ba r out     slider 1 and pull back ward (relea se lever
                                              of the opening.                                     2 jump s to the right),
                                                                                                z replace protectiv e ca p.
                                                                                                Insert lock into opening for coupling b all
                                                                                                bar: put cap on a t bottom first, then push
                                                                                                in from top.
                                                                                                Do not use steam -jet cleaners or other
                                                                                                high-pressure clea ners to clean the
                                                                                                coupling ball b ar.
                                                                                                St owage of coup ling ba ll bar
                                                                                                Place the coupling ba ll bar in the b ag as
                                                                                                show n on p age 166 in Fig. 11755 S and
                                                                                                attach next to the vehicle tools beneath the
                                                                                                spare wheel.




                                                                                                                                          169
Towing equipment with fixed                      Caravan and traile r loads1 )                    The permissible c aravan/trailer load should
coupling ball bar 3 , Combo                                                                       be fully utilised only by drivers w ho a re
                                                 The permissible caravan/trailer loads are
In the case of trailers/caravans with b ra ke,                                                    adequately exp erienced in tow ing large or
                                                 vehicle- and eng ine-dependent m aximum
attach break-away stop ping cable to ey e                                                         hea vy ca ravans/trailers.
                                                 values which must not be exceed ed. The
to right of coupling ball bar.                   actual carav an/trailer load is the difference   The permitted c aravan/trailer load a pplies
                                                 between the actual gross weight of the           up to the sp ecified inc line and up to a n
                                                 caravan/trailer and the actual coupling          altitude of 1000 m etres ab ov e sea lev el.
                                                 socket load with the caravan/trailer             S ince engine power decreases as altitud e
                                                 coupled. When the carava n/trailer load is       increa ses b ecause of the air becoming
                                                 being checked, therefore, only the               thinner, therefore reducing climb ing ability,
                                                 caravan/trailer w heels – and not the jock ey    the permitted towing weight also
                                                 wheel – must be standing on the weighing         decreases by 10 % for every 1000 metres of
                                                 apparatus.                                       add itional altitude. The towing w eight
                                                                                                  does not have to be reduced when driv ing
                                                 The permissible caravan/trailer loads for
                                                                                                  on roads with slight inclines (less tha n 8 %,
                                                 your vehicle are given in the vehicle
                                                                                                  e. g. motorways).
                                                 docum ents. Unless otherwise stated, they
                                                 are v alid for gradients up to ma x. 12 %.       The actual caravan/trailer load p lus the
                                                                                                  actual g ross vehicle weight of the towing
                                                                                                  vehicle m ust not exceed the maxim um
                                                                                                  permitted towing weight. For example, if
                                                                                                  the permitted gross v ehicle weight is
                                                                                                  utilised, the tra iler/ca ra van load must only
                                                                                                  be used until the m aximum permitted
                                                                                                  towing weight is reached . The maximum
                                                                                                  permitted towing weight is shown on the
                                                                                                  identification plate – see pa ge 232.




                                                 1)
                                                      Obs erve na tiona l reg ula tio ns.


170
                                               When m easuring the coupling sock et load,         Rear axle load during towing
                                               make sure that the draw bar of the loaded          C orsa
                                               tra iler/ca ra van is at the same heig ht a s it   When the caravan/tra iler is coupled a nd
                                               will be when the trailer/carav an is coupled       the tow ing vehicle fully loaded (including
                                               with the towing v ehicle loaded. Particularly      all occupa nts), the permissib le rear axle
                                               important for trailers/caravans with               load (see identification plate or vehicle
                                               tand em axle.                                      documents) ma y be ex ceeded by 45 kg
                                                                                                  and the permissib le gross vehicle weight by
                                                                                                  15 kg. If the permissible rear a xle loa d is
                                                                                                  exceeded, a maxim um sp eed of 60 m ph
                                                                                                  (100 km /h) applies. If nationa l regulations
                                                                                                  spec ify a lower maxim um sp eed for
                                                                                                  vehicles tow ing a carav an/trailer, this m ust
                                                                                                  be observed.
                                                                                                  C orsa van, C ombo
Coupling s ocket load                                                                             The permissib le ax le loads must not be
                                                                                                  exceeded.
The c oupling socket load is the load
exerted by the trailer/caravan on the
coupling ball. It can b e varied by changing
the w eight distribution when loa ding the
trailer/caravan.
The ma ximum permissible coup ling socket
load (50 kg) is specified on the towing
equipm ent identification plate and in the
vehic le documents. Alw ays aim for the
max imum load, especia lly in the ca se of
heav y carav ans/trailers. The c oupling
soc ket load should nev er fall below 25 kg.




                                                                                                                                             171
                                                                                                      Handling is greatly influenced by the
                                                                                                      loading of the trailer/c aravan. Loads
                                                                                                      should therefore b e sec ured so that they
                                                                                                      cannot slip and be placed in the centre of
                                                                                                      the tra iler/ca ra van if possible, i.e. ab ov e
                                                                                                      the axle.
                                                                                                      In the case of trailers with low driv ing
                                                                                                      stability, d o not exceed a speed of
                                                                                                      50 mp h (80 km/h); the use of a friction-typ e
                                                                                                      stabiliser is hig hly recomm ended.
                                                                                                      Do not drive faster than 50 m ph (80 km/h)
                                                                                                      if possible, even in countries where higher
                                                                                                      speeds are permitted.


Tyre pressure                                       Driving characteristics , towing tips
Increa se tyre pressure on the towing               For c aravans/trailers with b ra ke, attach the
vehic le to the value spec ified for a full loa d   break-a way stop ping ca ble to the ey e (see
(see pages 249, 250). Also check the                arrow in fig ure).
infla tion pressure of the sp are wheel a nd        Before a tta ching the trailer/caravan,
the c aravan/trailer wheels.                        lubricate the ball of the trailer/carav an
                                                    tow ing devic e. H ow ever, do not lubricate
                                                    the ball if a stab iliser, which acts on the
                                                    coupling b all, is being used to damp
                                                    hunting.
                                                    Check caravan/trailer lighting before
                                                    starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the
                                                    vehicle are deactiv ated w hen towing a
                                                    caravan or trailer.




172
Make sure that y ou hav e enough room              When driving downhill, towing a cara van/         The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
when c ornering and avoid sudden                   tra iler subjects the b rakes to a heavier load   cooling power is therefore independent of
manoeuv res.                                       than normal. For this reason, select the          the engine speed.
                                                   sam e gea r as when driving uphill and drive
If the tra iler/ca ra van starts to sway , drive                                                     S ince a c onsiderab le am ount of heat is
                                                   at a similar speed. With automatic trans-
more slowly, do not attem pt to correct the                                                          generated at high engine speeds and less
                                                   mission, enga ge p osition 3, 2 or even 1.
steering and brake sharply if necessary.                                                             at slower speeds, do not shift down when
                                                   Select D ag ain as soon as driving                climb ing hills whilst the vehic le is still coping
If full-on braking is required , depress the
                                                   conditions perm it.                               with the gradient in the hig her gear.
brake pedal as hard as possib le.
                                                   Easytronic 3 in automatic mode or                 Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10 %
Remem ber that the braking distance for
                                                   autom atic transmission 3 in D will               or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph
vehic les towing caravans/trailers w ith a nd
                                                   autom atic ally select the d riv ing              (30 km/h) in 1st gea r or 30 mp h (50 km/h)
without brake is a lways grea ter than that
                                                   prog ra mme with optimum eng ine braking          in 2nd gear; with automatic transmission,
for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer.
                                                   effect.                                           do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h)
                                                                                                     in position 1.




                                                                                                                                                    173
                                                 For vehicles with automatic transmission 3
                                                 or Easytronic 3 in automatic mode, apply
                                                 full throttle.
                                                 Before starting off under extreme
                                                 conditions (high c om bination w eight,
                                                 mountainous terrain with steep inc lines),
                                                 switch off all unnecessary elec trica l loa ds
                                                 such as hea ted rear window, a ir
                                                 conditioning system 3 and heated front
                                                 seats 3.




Starting on inclines
For vehicles with m anual transmission, the
most favourable engine speed when
starting off on an incline is b etween 2500
and 3000 rpm for p etrol engines a nd
between 2000 and 2500 rpm for diesel
engines. Hold engine speed constant,
enga ge c lutch grad ually (let slip), release
hand brake and op en throttle. If p ossible,
the engine speed should not drop during
this procedure.




174
Self-help    Disregard of these notes can lead to
                                                                  Do not start with quick charge r
                                                                  This prevents d amage to electronic
             injuries whic h may be fatal. Vehicle                components.
             passengers should be informed
             accordingly.                                         Do not start by pushing or towing
                                                                  Because your vehicle is fitted with a
            Diesel fuel system, ble eding                         cataly tic converter, it must not be started
            Nev er let the tank run dry ! If c ontrol             by pushing or towing – see page 145.
            indica tor Y illuminates, refuel as soon a s
            possible. Refuel immediately if it fla shes.
            It is p ossib le to restart the engine if the ta nk
            ha s b een run dry . A delayed start is to be
            exp ected. S witch on the ignition three tim es
            for a pprox. 15 seconds. Then attempt to
            start the engine for a pprox. 40 seconds. If
            the engine does not start, wait a few
            minutes and try ag ain. If the engine d oes
            not start, consult a workshop. We
            recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
            Repairer.




                                                                                                           175
Starting the engine with jump leads 3                                                          z Use auxiliary battery with sam e v olta ge
A vehicle with a discharged battery can be                                                       (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) m ust not be
started using jump lead s and the battery of                                                     considera bly less than that of the
another vehicle.                                                                                 discharged ba ttery. Voltage and
                                                                                                 capacity information can be found on
 This must be done with extrem e ca re.                                                          the batteries.
 Any dev iation from the following                                                             z Use jump leads with insulated terminals
 instruc tions c ould lea d to personal injury                                                   and a d ia meter of at least 16 mm 2
 or damage resulting from battery                                                                (25 mm 2 for diesel engines).
 explosion, as well as to damage to the
 elec trical sy stems in both vehicles.                                                        z Do not disconnect the discharged
                                                                                                 battery from the vehicle.
                                                                                               z Switch off all unnecessary electrical
                                                                                                 consumers.
                                                                                               z Do not lean over the ba ttery during jump
                                                 z Never ex pose the b attery to nak ed          starting.
                                                   flames or spark s.                          z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to
                                                 z A discharged battery can freeze at            touch those of the other lead .
                                                   temperatures as low a s 0 ° C. Alway s      z Do not touch the vehicles while jump
                                                   defrost a frozen battery in a warm space      starting.
                                                   before connecting jump leads.
                                                                                               z Apply hand brak e. Ma nual transmission
                                                 z Do not allow battery fluid to come into       or Easytronic in neutral, automatic
                                                   contact with eyes, skin, fa bric s or         tra nsmission 3 in P.
                                                   painted surfaces. The fluid contains
                                                   sulp huric ac id which can cause injuries
                                                   and d amage in the event of d irect
                                                   contact.
                                                 z Wear eye protec tion and protective
                                                   clothing when handling a b attery.




176
                                                z Do not connect leads to negative         z Start the engine of the v ehicle prov iding
                                                  term inal of discharged battery!           the jump start.
                                                z The connection p oint should be as far   z After 5 minutes, start the other engine.
                                                  away from the discharged battery as        Start attempts should be made at
                                                  possible.                                  intervals of 1 minute not last longer than
                                                                                             15 seconds.
                                                z Route the lead s so that they cannot
                                                  catch on rotating parts in the engine    z After starting, allow both eng ines to idle
                                                  compa rtm ent.                             for approx. 3 m inutes with the leads
                                                                                             connected.
                                                                                           z In order to a void ex cess voltage in the
                                                                                             electric al sy stem, b efore removing a
                                                                                             lead, sw itc h on a n electrica l consumer
                                                                                             (e.g. light, heated rear window) in the
                                                                                             vehicle receiving the jump sta rt.
Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the                                               z Reverse abov e seq uence exac tly when
illustration:                                                                                removing leads.
1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to
   the positiv e terminal 1 of the battery
   prov iding the jump start (identified by
   "+" sign on battery case or terminal).
2. Connect the other end of this lea d to the
   positive terminal 2 of the discharged
   battery (" +" sign).
3. Connect the first end of the other jump
   lead to the negativ e terminal 3 of the
   battery prov iding the start ("–" sign).
4. Connect the other end of the second
   jump lead 4 to ground on the other
   vehicle, e. g. engine block or screw
   connection in the engine suspension.




                                                                                                                                     177
Towing the vehicle                           The towing eye is located in the stowage           S crew in the towing ey e anticlock wise as far
To open the cap of the front right towing    compartment of the tyre repair k it 3 or in        as it will g o until it stops in a horizontal
eye: Disenga ge the b ottom of the cap and   the p ouch for vehic le tools 3, loc ated in the   position.
pull downwards to remove.                    spare wheel well in the luggag e                   Attach a tow rop e 3 – or better still a tow
                                             compartment.                                       rod 3 – to the ey e.
                                             For reasons of design, the wheel well              S witc h on ig nition to release steering
                                             insert 3 must not be remove. The                   column lock a nd to perm it operation of
                                             installation position is ind icated by an          brak e lights, horn and windscreen wiper.
                                             arrow pointing to the direction of travel.
                                                                                                Manual transmission in neutral, Easytronic 3
                                             Ty re repair kit 3 – see pa ge 190.                or automatic transmission 3 in N .
                                             Jack 3 and vehicle tools 3 – see page 184.
                                             Spare wheel 3 – see page 182.




178
Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Ex cessive   To prev ent the entry of exhaust fumes from    Towing se rvice
tractive forc e ca n damage the vehicle.           the towing vehic le, switch on the air         Entrust your vehicle only to the towing
                                                   recirculation 3 and close the windows.         service of your choice and obtain an
 Significa ntly g reater force is required for                                                    estimate on towing costs before employing
                                                   Consult a work shop. We recom mend y our
 braking: The brake servo unit is only                                                            any tow ing service. In this way y ou avoid
                                                   Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, w ho w ill
 op erational when the engine is running.                                                         unnecessary c osts and possible insurance
                                                   serve you best to get your vehicle ba ck on
 Considerably g reater steering force is           the road.                                      problems during claim processing.
 necessary since this unit is operativ e only
                                                   If the automatic clutch has been manually
 when the engine is running.
                                                   relea sed in vehic les with Easytronic 3
                                                   because of an interrup tion to the power
Vehicles with automatic transmission 3
                                                   supply, towing is not permitted – see
should b e towed facing forward only a nd
                                                   page 130. In this c ase, consult a work shop
must not be towed faster than 50 mph
                                                   as soon as possible. We recommend that
(80 km/h) or further tha n 60 miles (100 k m).
                                                   you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
If the tra nsmission is defective, or if the
                                                   Repairer.
above speed or d istance is to be exceeded,
the front axle must be raised off the
ground .




                                                                                                                                         179
Towing another vehicle                             Warning triangle ¨ 3 and                        C ombo, C ombo C rew va n
Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow        first-aid kit (cushion) + 3                     The warning triangle and first-aid kit
rod 3 – to the rear towing ey e on the right       Corsa                                           (cushion) are stowed in a c om partment in
side of the vehicle underbody, but nev er to       Strap the warning triangle and first-a id kit   the side panel trim on the left-hand side.
the rear ax le.                                    (c ushion) to the right side panel of the
                                                   lugg age compartment using a rubber
Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Ex cessive
                                                   strap as illustra ted.
tractive forc e ca n damage the vehicle.




180
Release flap by p ressing retaining lugs.   Comb o van
                                            Plac e the warning tria ngle and first-a id kit
                                            (c ushion) in the stowag e comp artment
                                            behind the driver’s seat. Disengage the
                                            flap 3 by pressing the retaining lug and
                                            remove.




                                                                                              181
Spare w hee l 3                                   Comb o                                            3. Unhook the catch and lower the spare
Corsa                                             The spare wheel 3 is stowed at the rea r             wheel.
The spare wheel 3 is in the lug gage              underneath the vehicle floor.                     4. Detach the safety ca ble.
compartment and is secured beneath a              1. Fully release the hexagon b olt in the loa d
floor cover p late using a wing nut. Undo                                                           5. Lower the holder fully and take out the
                                                     compa rtm ent floor using the wheel bolt          spa re wheel.
the clips beneath the loading sill and lift the      wrench. Vehicle tools – see page 184.
floor cover p late.                                                                                   Vehic les with a temporary spare wheel 3
                                                  2. Lift the spare wheel holder.                     ha ve a spacer ring between the
                                                                                                      temporary sp are and the vehic le
                                                                                                      underbody.
                                                                                                    6. Wheel changing – see page 185.




182
                                                   General i nformati on                             Not es on temp orary sp arewheel 3
                                                   Depend ing on the version, the sp are             z Using a temp orary spare w heel may
                                                   wheel may be designed for use a s a                 chang e the driving behaviour of the
                                                   temporary spa re 3 . The temporary spare            vehicle, particularly if using winter
                                                   is d esigna ted b y a sticker on the rim.           tyres 3 . Replace defective ty re a s quickly
                                                   Follow the instruc tions on this pa ge a nd         as possible, balance wheel and fit to
                                                   pages 164, 249.                                     vehicle.
                                                   On vehicles with alloy w heels 3 the spare        z Fit only one tem pora ry spare wheel.
                                                   wheel may ha ve a steel rim .
                                                                                                     z Do not drive faster than 50 mph
                                                   If you use winter ty res 3, the spare wheel         (80 km /h).
                                                   may still be fitted with a summ er tyre. If you
                                                   use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling        z Take curv es slow ly .
                                                   may be a ltered. Ob tain a repla cement for       z Do not use the temporary spare wheel
                                                   the faulty tyre as soon a s p ossible, and          for a lengthy p eriod.
                                                   ha ve the wheel balanced and fitted to the
7. Place the repla ced wheel in the spare          vehicle.                                          z Replac e temporary spare w heel with full
   wheel hold er with the outside of the                                                               specification wheel without delay.
                                                   The spare wheel may hav e a sm aller tyre
   wheel facing upwards.                                                                             z Do not use tyre cha ins. I f tyre c hains
                                                   and a smaller rim than the wheels m ounted
   If a full specification w heel is stow ed, do   on the vehicle: Using the spare wheel ma y          must be used when one of the front tyres
   not fit the spacer ring between the             alter the driving behav iour of the vehicle.        ha s a flat, mount the temporary spare
   wheel and the vehicle und erbody.               Have the defective tyre rep laced as soon           wheel on the rear axle and transfer one
                                                   as p ossible, b alance the w heel a nd hav e it     of the rea r wheels to the front a xle.
8. Lift the spa re wheel holder, insert the                                                            Check the ty re pressure a nd correct if
                                                   mounted on the v ehicle.
   sa fety ca ble.                                                                                     necessary. See pag e 249.
9. Lift the spare wheel holder and engage                                                            z Note the inform ation on the temporary
   in the c atch. The open sid e of the catch                                                          spa re wheel on pag es 164, 249.
   must point towards the rear.
10. Turn the hexa gon bolt in the load
    compartment floor with the wheel bolt
    wrench to raise the spare w heel holder
    all the w ay up.




                                                                                                                                                183
Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3                   In v ehicles with ty re repair kit 3, the v ehicle   The ja ck is secured in place by a wing
Corsa                                          tools and the repair kit are stowed together         screw. The vehicle tools are secured to the
The jac k 3 and vehicle tools 3 have been      in a com partment in the spa re wheel well of        jack with rub ber ba nd s.
specially dev eloped for your vehicle and      the luggage compartment.
must only be used on that vehicle. Only use    For reasons of design, the wheel well
the jac k for changing wheels.                 insert 3 must not be remove. The
The jack and vehicle tools are loca ted in a   installation position is ind icated by an
pouch in the luggage compartment below         arrow pointing to the direction of travel.
the sp are wheel. Removing the spare wheel     Comb o, Comb o Crew v an
– see pa ge 182.                               The jack a nd 3 vehicle tools 3 are located
                                               in a stowa ge c om partment in the side
                                               panel trim on the right-hand side.
                                               Release the flap by p ressing the retaining
                                               lugs. See Figure.




184
                                              Changing wheels                                z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
                                              In order to reduce the chance of possible        wheel to be chang ed b y placing wedge
                                              injuries, m ake the following prepa ra tions     blocks or equivalent in front and behind
                                              and note the procedure:                          the wheel.
                                              z Park on a level, firm a nd non-slippery      z Use the ja ck only to change wheels.
                                                surface.                                     z If the ground on which the vehicle is
                                              z Sw itch on haz ard warning lights,             standing is soft, a solid board (max . 1 cm
                                                apply hand brake, selector lev er in P         thick ) should be placed under the jack.
                                                (automatic transm ission 3 ) / engag e         Using a thicker board could damage the
                                                1st gear or reverse (manual transmission       jack and the vehic le.
                                                or Easy tronic 3 ).                          z No people or a nima ls m ay be in the
                                              z C orrectly set up the warning triangle.        vehicle when it is jack ed up.
                                                Warning tria ngle – see page 180.            z Never cra wl und er a ja cked-up vehicle.
                                              z Take the spare wheel from the lugg age       z Do not start or run the engine while the
Com bo                                          compa rtm ent or from undernea th the          vehicle is on the jack.
The jack 3 and vehicle tools 3 a re secured     vehicle floor.
behind the driver’s seat.                                                                                                               6
                                              z Before raising the vehicle, set the front
The jac k is secured in place by a wing         wheels to the straight-ahead p osition.
screw. The vehicle tools are secured to the
                                              z Never change m ore than one w heel at
jack with rubb er bands.
                                                once.




                                                                                                                                       185
1. Prise off the hub cap using a screwdriver,   Prise off the wheel trim 3 using the   Alloy wheels 3: Prise off the hub c ap
   positioning the sc rewdriver at the recess   hook 3.                                using a screwdriver, positioning the
   at the side of the hub cap. Vehicle tools                                           screwdriver at the recess at the side of
   – see page 184.                                                                     the hub cap.
                                                                                       Remov e wheel b olt caps 3 from wheel
                                                                                       bolts.




186
Alloy wheels w ith a nti-theft lock 3:   2. Slac ken wheel b olts using wheel bolt   3. The jacking p oints 3 on the vehicle
Release hub cap using key included in       wrench 3, putting on the w heel bolt        underbody are ma rked by depressions
vehicle tools and remove it.                wrench 3 as far as possible.                on the lower body sill.

                                                                                                                               6




                                                                                                                          187
  On som e vehicles, the jac king points are   4. Before attaching jack 3, set to required        When turning the crank , ensure that the
  concealed by flap s. Fold the flap              height by hand. Fit jack arm at front – or      edge of the ja ck base is planted on a
  outwards.                                       rea r – in such a way that jack claw (arrow     non-slippery surface and is vertica lly in
                                                  in illustration) goes around the v ertical      line with the contact point.
                                                  ridge and engag es into the recess in the       If this is not the ca se, carefully lower the
                                                  ridge.                                          vehicle immediately and reposition the
                                                                                                  jack.
                                                                                                  Raise vehicle b y turning crank handle.
                                                                                                5. Unscrew w heel bolts and put somewhere
                                                                                                   where the thread s w ill not b e soiled.
                                                                                                6. Change the wheel. For inform ation on
                                                                                                   the spare wheel – see page 182; for
                                                                                                   information on the temporary spare
                                                                                                   wheel – see pages 164, 183, 249.




188
                                                 10. Before refitting the w heel trim, clean the   11. Close the jacking point flap on the
                                                     wheel around the retaining clips. Valv e          underside of the vehicle 3. Stow the
                                                     sym bol 3 on back of wheel trim must              repla ced w heel – see page 182. Put
                                                     point towards va lv e on wheel.                   away the tools and warning triangle –
                                                                                                       see pages 180, 184.
                                                    Align and engage hub cap or wheel
                                                    trim 3 and wheel bolt c aps 3.                 12. Check the pressure of the new ly fitted
                                                                                                       wheel. Adjust as necessary.
                                                    Alloy wheels 3 : Put hub cap on and
                                                    engage, inserting pin on rear of hub           13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel
                                                    ca p into relevant hole in wheel.                  bolts on the new wheel checked on the
                                                                                                       vehicle using a torque wrench as soon
                                                    Alloy wheels with anti-theft lock 3: Put
                                                                                                       as possib le and , if necessary, corrected.
                                                    hub ca p on. Insert and tighten anti-
                                                                                                       Tightening torque – see page 249.
                                                    theft lock 3.
                                                                                                   14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel
                                                                                                       that was rem oved.
7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slig htly,                                                     15. Replace the tem pora ry spare wheel 3
   inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far                                                            with a full specification wheel without
   as possible.                                                                                        delay.
8. Lower vehicle.
9. Tighten wheel bolts crossw ise, putting on
   wheel bolt wrench 3 as fa r as possible.




                                                                                                                                              189
Tyre repair kit 3                               The tyre repair k it of the Corsa is located in
Minor damag e to the tyre tread and             a compartment in the spare wheel well in
sidewall, e. g. foreign bodies, can be          the luggage compartment. O n Combo
rem edied with the ty re repair kit.            Crew van, the k it is located behind a c ov er
                                                to the left in the sid e trim of the luggage
Do not rem ov e the foreign body from the       compartment. On the Combo, it is located
tyre.                                           in a com partment behind the d riv er’s seat.
Tyre d amage exceeding 4 mm or that is on       To op en the cover, press to relea se the
the rim cannot be repaired with the ty re       retaining lugs.
rep air kit.
                                                1. Remove bag containing tyre repair kit
 Driv ing with inadequa te tyre pressure or        from compa rtm ent. C arefully remove
 a flat tyre can lea d to hidden ty re             parts from bag.
 damage, which ca nnot be elim ina ted by       2. Remove the comp ressor.
 using the ty re repair kit. Part the vehicle
 and consult a workshop. We recommend
 your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.                                                               3. Remov e the electrical connection cable
                                                                                                     and air hose from the stowage
Imp ortant information – see page 193.                                                               compartments on the underside of the
                                                                                                     compressor.
In the event of a flat tyre:
z Switch on hazard wa rning lights,
   apply hand b rake, selector lever in P
   (automatic tra nsmission 3) / eng age
   1st gear or reverse (manual transmission
   or Easytronic 3).
z Correctly set up the w arning triangle.
  Warning triangle – see page 180.




190
4. Screw the compressor air hose to the           7. Sc rew the filler hose to the ty re v alve.   10. Switch on ignition.
   connection on the sealant bottle.              8. The switch on the compressor m ust be         11. Set the rocker switch on the com pressor
5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on         set to §.                                         to I. The tyre is filled with sea lant.
   the compressor.                                9. Plug the c om pressor connec tor into the     12. While the sealant bottle drains (a pprox.
  Set the compressor near the ty re in such          accessory socket or the ciga rette lig hter       30 seconds) the pressure ind icator on
  a way tha t the sealant b ottle is up rig ht.      socket. Accessory sockets – see page 75.          the com pressor briefly points to 6 b ar.
                                                                                                       Pressure then sink s a gain.
6. Remove the v alve cap from the defective
   ty re.                                                                                          13. All of the sea la nt is pump ed into the
                                                                                                       tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with
                                                                                                       air.
                                                                                                   14. The presc rib ed ty re pressure (see
                                                                                                       page 249) should b e reached within
                                                                                                       10 m inutes. Switch off the com pressor
                                                                                                       when the correct pressure is obtained.




                                                                                                                                              191
                                                    Drain excess tyre pressure with the
                                                    button over the pressure indicator.
                                                    Do not run the com pressor for more
                                                    than 10 minutes – see "I mportant
                                                    information" on page 193.
                                                 15. Detach the ty re repair kit. Screw the
                                                     filler hose to the free connection on the
                                                     sea lant bottle. This prev ents sealant
                                                     leakage. S tow the ty re repair kit in the
                                                     luggag e com partment.
                                                 16. Wipe away any sea la nt spill with a
                                                     cloth.
                                                 17. C olla pse the warning triangle and stow
                                                     it in the luggage compartment or
  If the p rescrib ed ty re p ressure is not         stowage compartment. See page 180.                 If tyre pressure is more tha n 1.3 ba r,
  reached within 10 m inutes, detach the         18. An enclosed stick er indicates the                 adjust to the prescribed va lue. Repea t
  tyre rep air kit. Move the vehicle one ty re       m aximum p ermitted sp eed when                    the p rocedure until there is no more
  revolution (approx. 2 m eters) in or               driv ing with a rep aired tyre. Affix this in      pressure loss.
  against the direction of travel.                   the driver’ s field of view.                       If tyre pressure is below 1.3, the vehicle
  Reconnect the tyre repa ir kit and
                                                 19. C ontinue driving immediately to allow             must not be driven. C onsult a work shop.
  continue the filling procedure for
                                                     the sealant to distrib ute evenly                  We recommend your Vaux hall
  10 m inutes. If the prescribed ty re
                                                     throughout the tyre. Stop after approx.            Authorised R epairer.
  pressure is still not rea ched, the tyre is
  too badly damaged. Park the vehicle                6 miles (10 km ) or no more than 10             20. Stow the tyre repair k it. See page 190.
  and consult a workshop. We                         m inutes, then check tyre pressure.
  recomm end y our Vauxhall Authorised               S crew the compressor air hose directly
  Repa irer.                                         onto the ty re v alve (see Fig. 15798 T).




192
Im portant                                        The sealant can only be stored for approx.
                                                  4 years. After this time, the sealing
 Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph                prop erties can no longer be gua ra nteed.
 (80 km/h). Have the tyre permanently             Heed the exp iration date on the sealant
 repaired or rep laced before subjecting it       bottle.
 to prolonged usa ge.
                                                  The sealant bottle can only be used once.
 Have the repaired tyre replaced a s soon         Replace a used sealant bottle.
 as p ossible.
                                                  The compressor and the sealant can be
 Steerability and d riv ing behav iour m ay       used up to approx im ately -30 °C .
 be im paired.
                                                  Dispose of a used tyre repa ir kit in
                                                  accordance with applicable legislation.
If the compressor makes abnorm al noises
or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least   An adapter for filling air m attresses, inner
30 minutes.                                       tubes, etc . is located on the underside of
                                                  the comp ressor. Remov e b y unscrewing the
The integrated safety valv e opens a t a
                                                  compressor air hose and pulling out the
pressure of 7 bar.
                                                  adapter.
Protect the compressor from m oisture and
rain.




                                                                                                  193
Ele ctrical system                               Fuse box                                      Remove an additional cover 3 (m arked in
                                                 The fuse box is located in the engine         y ellow in the figure).
 Elec tronic ig nition system s genera te very   compartment next to the coolant
 high v oltag es. Do not touch the ignition      exp ansion tank.
 system ; high voltage can be fatal.
                                                 Disenga ge c ov er of fuse box from lug and
                                                 lift off.
Fuses
A defective fuse can be recog nized b y its
melted w ire. A new fuse should only be
installed after the cause of the trouble has
been rectified.




194
                                                                                          Alway s use fuses with the correct current
                                                                                          va lue. This is shown on eac h fuse, and is
                                                                                          also indicated by the fuse colour and the
                                                                                          plug-in location in the fuse box .

                                                                                            Fuse                       Fuse
                                                                                            colour                     rating
                                                                                            Grey                       2A
                                                                                            Brow nish yellow           5A
                                                                                            Brow n                     7. 5 A
                                                                                            Red                        10 A
                                                                                            Blue                       15 A
                                                                                            Yellow                     20 A
                                                                                            Light green                30 A
It is adv isable to carry a complete set of       Before replacing a fuse, turn off the     Pink (Maxi-Fuse)           30 A
fuses – ava ila ble from a ny Va ux hall          respective switch and the ignition.       Orange                     40 A
Authorised Repairer.                                                                        Red (M axi-Fuse)           50 A
                                                  Slot fuse-gripping tool onto fuse and
Store spa re fuses in the plac e provided in      withdra w it.                             Yellow (Maxi-Fuse)         60 A
the fuse box, to the right of w hich there is a                                             Black (Max i-Fuse)         80 A
fuse ex tractor which facilita tes fuse
rep la cement (spa re fuses and the fuse
extractor are marked in yellow in the
figure).




                                                                                                                                  195
                                                                                                Fuse   C ircuit                  Rating
                                                                                                  5    Electric w indow (left) 20 A
                                                                                                  6    Automatic transmission 10 A
                                                                                                  7    H eadlight wash system    30 A
                                                                                                  8    S tarter                  10 A
                                                                                                  9    Fuel injec tion system,   20 A
                                                                                                       fuel pump,
                                                                                                       stationa ry heater
                                                                                                  10   H orn                     10 A
                                                                                                  11   C entral control unit     15 A
                                                                                                  12   I nformation display,     20 A
                                                                                                       infotainment system:
                                                                                                       engine 1) Z 13 DT,        10 A
Fuses and the most important                         Fuse   Circ ui t                 Rat ing          Z 17 DTH
circuits the y prote ct
                                                       3    Instruments,              7.5 A       13   Vauxhall alarm sy stem    7. 5 A
Some circuits m ay be protected by severa l                 information display,
fuses.                                                                                            14   Exterior m irrors         7. 5 A
                                                            light switch,
The figures on pag es 196, 197 depict                       horn,                                 15   Windscreen wash           15 A
the fuse b ox es of vehic les with engine                   hazard wa rning lights,                    system
Z 13 DT 1 ). Fuse box es of other engines                   immobiliser                           16   C ourtesy light           7. 5 A
are dep ic ted on pa ges 198, 199.                     4    Towing equipment,         20 A        17   C entral control unit     20 A
Fuse        C ircuit                        Rating          num ber pla te lights                 18   S un roof                 20 A
     1      C entral control unit           7.5 A
     2      Eng ine control unit            7.5 A




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 235.


196
Fuse        C ircuit                        Rating
     19     Electric window (right)         20 A
            Eng ine Z 12 XEP 1)
            with Easy tronic:
            Vauxhall alarm sy stem          5A
     20     Xenon head lig hts              5A
            Eng ine Z 12 XEP 1)
            with Easy tronic:
            electric window (right)         20 A
     21     Xenon head lig hts              5A
     22     C entral control unit,          5A
            imm ob iliser
     23     Windscreen w ip er              30 A
                                                     Fuse   Circ ui t             Rat ing   Fuse   C ircuit                Rating
     24     Infotainment system,            5A
            inform ation display ,                     25   Rev ersing lights,                26   S eat heater (right)    15 A
            light switch,                                   cigarette lighter,    20 A             Motor Z 12 XEP 1)
            courtesy light,                                 accessory socket                       with Easytronic:
            instruments,                                    Engine Z 12 XEP 1 )                    automatic tra nsmission,
            EPS                                             with Easytronic:                       injec tion system,
                                                            brake lights          10 A             reversing lights,
                                                                                                   cig arette lig hter,
                                                                                                   ac cessory socket        20 A




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 234.


                                                                                                                                   197
                                                                                            Fuse   C ircuit                   Rating
                                                                                              30   Engine control unit        15 A
                                                                                              31   Air conditioning sy stem   15 A
                                                                                              32   ABS ,                    5A
                                                                                                   Easytronic,
                                                                                                   automatic tra nsmission,
                                                                                                   airba g
                                                                                              33   Petrol engine:
                                                                                                   Engine control unit        15 A
                                                                                                   Diesel engine:
                                                                                                   Engine control unit        7. 5 A
                                                                                              34   Diesel filter heater       30 A
                                                                                              35   S un roof,                 5A
Fuse        C ircuit                        Rating                                                 electric w indow,
                                                     Fuse   Circ ui t             Rat ing
                                                                                                   infotainment system
     27     S eat heater (left)             15 A       28   ABS                   25 A
                                                                                              36   Dipp ed b eam (left)       10 A
            Eng ine Z 12 XEP 1)                             Engine Z 12 XEP 1 )
                                                                                                   Xenon headlights           15 A
            with Easy tronic:                               with Easytronic:
            hea ted seat (rig ht)           15 A            heated seat (left)    15 A        37   Dipp ed b eam (right)      10 A
                                                       29   Rear wind ow wiper    20 A             Xenon headlights           15 A




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 234.


198
Fuse   C ircuit                  Rating
  38   Tail light (left),        5A
       park ing lig ht (left)
  39   Tail light (right),       5A
       park ing lig ht (right)
  40   Brake lights,             10 A
       cruise control
  41   Fog lights                15 A
  42   Fog tail light            10 A
  43   Main b eam (left)         10 A
  44   Main b eam (right)        10 A
  45   Ventilation fan           30 A
  46   Eng ine control unit      20 A
                                          Fuse       C ircuit                           Rat ing   Fuse   C ircuit                   Rating
  47   Heated rear w indow       30 A
                                               52    C ooling fan: Petrol                           53   Air conditioning sy stem
  48   S ta rter                 30 A                engine with air                                     cooling fan:
  49   EPS                       50 A                conditioning                       30 A             Petrol engine              30 A
                                                     Engine Z 10 XE,                                     Diesel engine              40 A
  50   ABS,                      40 A
                                                     Z 12 XEP 1)                                    54   Easytronic                 60 A
       TC, ES P
                                                     without air conditioning           20 A
  51   Petrol engine:                                Engine Z 14 XE, Z 18 XE1 )
       Easy tronic               60 A                without air conditioning           40 A
       Diesel engine:                                Diesel engine                      40 A
       Eng ine control unit      80 A




                                          1)
                                               Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ge 234.


                                                                                                                                           199
Bulb replacem ent
Before replacing a bulb , switch ignition off
and switch relevant switch off.
O nly hold new b ulb at base! Do not touc h
the b ulb glass with b are hands, otherwise
fingerprints on the glass evap orate.
Residue builds up on the reflector
eventually resulting in a dull reflector.
Inadvertently stained bulbs may b e
cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using
alcohol or white spirits.
The replacement bulb must be in
accordance with the d ata on the ba se of
the defective bulb . Do not ex ceed wattage
given on bulb base.
                                                Halogen headlight system                     3. Rotate the cap anticlock wise and
Headlight aiming                                dipped and main beam                            rem ov e.
We recommend that head light a im ing be        Head lig ht system with separate bulbs for
carried out by y our Vauxhall Authorised        dipped bea m 1 (outer bulbs) and main
Repairer, who will have special equipment.      beam 2 (inner bulbs).
When adjusting headlights, headlight            Di pped beam
range adjustment must be set to 0.              1. O pen bonnet and eng age support.
                                                2. When replacing bulbs on the left-hand
                                                   side, open the cover of the fuse box.
                                                   When replacing bulb s on the right-hand
                                                   side, detach the air hose from the air
                                                   filter. Lift off the filler neck of the
                                                   headlight wash reservoir 3 .




200
                                                                                     10. After replacing bulbs on the left-hand
                                                                                         sid e, close the cover of the fuse b ox .
                                                                                        After replac ing bulbs on the right-hand
                                                                                        sid e, reattach the air hose to the air
                                                                                        filter. Refit the filler neck of the
                                                                                        headlight w ash reservoir 3.




4. Push bulb on plug connec tor         6. Detach plug c onnec tor from bulb base.
   downward.                            7. Fit connector onto new b ulb, without
5. Rem ov e b ulb with connector from      touching the gla ss.
   reflec tor housing.                  8. I nsert the bulb with connector so that
                                           the lug engag es in the recess in the
                                           reflector.
                                        9. Place head lig ht protective cover in
                                           position and close.




                                                                                                                               201
Mai n bea m                                   4. Detach plug connector from bulb.              6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.
1. Open bonnet and engage supp ort.           5. Disengag e spring wire clip from              7. When fitting a new bulb, eng age the
                                                 retaining lugs by m ov ing it forw ard a nd      lugs in the rec esses on the reflector
2. When replacing bulb s on the left-hand
                                                 swivelling it to the side.                       without touching the g lass.
   side, open the cov er of the fuse box.
                                                                                               8. Engag e sp ring wire clip, p lug connector
   When rep la cing bulbs on the right-hand
                                                                                                  onto bulb .
   side, d etach the air hose from the a ir
   filter.                                                                                     9. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in
                                                                                                  position and close.
3. Rotate the cap a nticlockw ise and
   remove.                                                                                     10. After replacing bulbs on the left-hand
                                                                                                   sid e, close the cover of the fuse b ox .
                                                                                                  After replac ing bulbs on the right-hand
                                                                                                  sid e, reattach the air hose to the air
                                                                                                  filter and engage.




202
Haloge n headlight system,                    5. Remove side light b ulb mounting from    8. Insert bulb socket in reflector.
parking lights                                   reflector.                               9. Attach connector to main beam bulb .
1. Open bonnet and engage supp ort.           6. Remove bulb from socket.                 10. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in
2. When replacing bulb s on the left-hand     7. I nsert new bulb, without touching the       position and close.
   side, open the cov er of the fuse box.        gla ss.                                  11. After replacing bulbs on the left-hand
   When rep la cing bulbs on the right-hand                                                   sid e, close the cover of the fuse b ox .
   side, d etach the air hose from the a ir
                                                                                             After replac ing bulbs on the right-hand
   filter.
                                                                                             sid e, reattach the air hose to the air
3. Rotate the main beam headlight cap                                                        filter and engage.
   anticloc kwise and remove.
4. Detach p lug connector from main
   bea m bulb.




                                                                                                                                       203
                                                                                                 7. After replacing bulbs on the left-hand
                                                                                                    sid e, close the cover of the fuse b ox .
                                                                                                    After replac ing bulbs on the right-hand
                                                                                                    sid e, reattach the air hose to the air
                                                                                                    filter. Refit the filler neck of the
                                                                                                    headlight w ash reservoir 3.




Haloge n headlight system,                    4. Push b ulb into holder a little, rota te left
front indicator lights                           and remove.
1. Open bonnet and engage supp ort.           5. I nsert new bulb, without touching the
2. When replacing bulb s on the left-hand        gla ss.
   side, open the cov er of the fuse box.     6. Engage holder into reflector by rotating
   When rep la cing bulbs on the right-hand      to the right.
   side, d etach the air hose from the a ir
   filter. Lift off the filler neck of the
   headlight wa sh reservoir 3.
3. Rotate b ulb holder to left a nd
   disengage.




204
                                                                                            9. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in
                                                                                               position and close.
                                                                                            10. After replacing bulbs on the left-hand
                                                                                                sid e, close the cover of the fuse b ox .
                                                                                               After replac ing bulbs on the right-hand
                                                                                               sid e, reattach the air hose to the air
                                                                                               filter. Refit the filler neck of the
                                                                                               headlight w ash reservoir 3.




Ellipsoidal headlight sys tem ,               4. Detach plug connector from bulb.
dipped be am                                  5. Disengag e the spring wire clip from the
Headlight sy stem with sep arate bulbs for       lugs and swivel it aside.
dipped beam (inner bulb s) and m ain beam
(outer bulbs).                                6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.
                                              7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the
1. Open bonnet and engage supp ort.
                                                 lugs in the recesses on the reflector
2. When replacing bulb s on the left-hand        without touc hing the glass.
   side, open the cov er of the fuse box.
                                              8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector
   When rep la cing bulbs on the right-hand      onto bulb.
   side, d etach the air hose from the a ir
   filter. Lift off the filler neck of the
   headlight wa sh reservoir 3.
3. Rem ov e the headlight protective cover
   by p ressing the catch and pulling the
   cover downward and off.




                                                                                                                                        205
                                                                                                    Ellipsoidal he adlight s yste m,
                                                                                                    main be am , parking lights
                                                                                                    We recommend that you have bulbs
                                                                                                    changed by your Va ux ha ll Authorised
                                                                                                    Repairer.




Ellipsoidal headlight sys tem ,                  4. Push b ulb into holder a little, rota te left
front indicator lights                              and remove.
1. Open bonnet and engage supp ort.              5. I nsert new bulb, without touching the
2. When replacing bulb s on the left-hand           gla ss.
   side, open the cover of the fuse b ox . For   6. Engage holder into reflector by rotating
   engine Z 13 DT 1 ), also pull the relay box      to the right.
   (loca ted in front of the fuse box) up and
                                                 7. After replacing b ulbs on the left-ha nd
   out of the guides.
                                                    side, c lose the cover of the fuse box. For
      When rep la cing bulbs on the right-hand      engine Z 13 DT 1), also position and
      side, d etach the air hose from the a ir      engage the relay box .
      filter.
                                                    After replacing bulbs on the right-hand
3. Rotate b ulb holder to left a nd                 side, rea ttac h the air hose to the air
   disengage.                                       filter and engag e.




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 234.


206
Xe non headlight system,                      Xenon headlight system,                          4. Push bulb into holder a little, rotate left
dipped be am                                  front indicator lights                              and remove.
Headlight sy stem with sep arate bulbs for    1. O pen bonnet and eng age support.             5. Insert new bulb, without touching the
dipped beam (inner bulb s) and m ain beam                                                         glass.
                                              2. When replacing bulbs on the left-hand
(outer bulbs).                                   side, open the cover of the fuse box. For     6. Engag e holder into reflector by rotating
                                                 engine Z 13 DT 1) , also pull the relay box      to the right.
 The Xenon headlight dipp ed beam
                                                 (located in front of the fuse box) up a nd
 op erates at very hig h voltage. Do not                                                       7. After replacing bulbs on the left-hand
                                                 out of the guid es.
 touch the ignition system; danger to life.                                                       sid e, close the cover of the fuse box. For
 We recomm end that you ha ve the b ulbs            When replacing bulb s on the right-hand       engine Z 13 DT 1 ), also position and
 cha nged by your Vauxhall Authorised               side, detach the air hose from the air        engag e the relay box.
 Repairer.                                          filter.
                                                                                                  After replac ing bulbs on the right-hand
                                              3. Rotate bulb holder to left and                   sid e, reattach the air hose to the air
                                                 disenga ge.                                      filter and engage.




                                              1)
                                                   Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ge 234.


                                                                                                                                         207
Ellipsoidal headlight sys tem ,
main beam, parking lights
Hav e the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.

Xe non headlight system,
main beam, parking lights
Hav e the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.

Fog lights 3
Hav e the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.                                                                             3. Diseng age the cable connector using a
                                          Turn signal, brake, tail,
                                          and revers ing lights ,                        screwdriver and detach it from the b ulb
Fog tail light 3,                         Corsa                                          mounting.
Corsa
                                          1. Unscrew the two screws from the bulb
Hav e the bulbs replaced by a workshop.      housing using a screwdriv er.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.                                 2. Pull bulb housing to rear so that it
                                             disengages from the locking elem ents.




208
4. Unscrew the four sc rews from the b ulb       Brake lights, rear lights,                 2. Detach plug connector from bulb
   mounting using a screwdriver. Detach          indicator lights,                             mounting.
   the bulb mounting from the housing.           reversing lights and                       3. Grip the bulb housing from the outside,
  Lights from top to bottom:
                                                 fog tail lights,                              slack en the two knurled nuts using the
  Ind icator light                               Combo                                         wheel bolt key and unscrew b y hand.
  Bra ke lig ht/Rear lig ht                      1. Disengage cover by pressing retaining
                                                    lugs and rem ove.                       4. Detach bulb housing.
  Reversing light
5. Remove bulb from socket.
6. Insert new bulb (without touc hing the
   glass), fit bulb m ounting into housing
   and secure w ith screws. Engage cable
   connector, insert b ulb housing in v ehicle
   body with fixing p ins and secure with
   screws.




                                                                                                                                   209
5. Press reta ining lugs on bulb m ounting                  Number plate light                              2. Rotate bulb holder to left and
   together and remove bulb mounting, as                    Corsa                                              disengage.
   shown in illustration.
                                                            1. Insert screwd riv er vertically on right-
     Lights from top to bottom:                                hand side of bulb housing , exert pressure
     Reversing light/brake light                               towards the right and disengage spring.
     Ind icator light                                          Remove the bulb housing downw ards.
     Reversing light
     Fog tail light 1 )
6. Remove bulb from socket.
7. Insert new bulb, without touching the
   glass. Engage bulb mounting in bulb
   housing. Insert bulb housing into v ehicle
   body. S crew fix ing nuts onto setsc rews
   by hand and tig hten. Enga ge p lug
   connector. Place cov er in position and
   close.



1)
     Mod el-sp ecific version: fog ta il lig ht on rig ht
     only.


210
3. Remove bulb from socket.                Comb o                                    2. Press b ulb slightly towards spring clip
                                                                                        and rem ov e.
4. Insert new bulb, without touching the   1. Unscrew b oth screw s. Remov e light
   glass.                                     insert.                                3. Insert new b ulb, without touching the
                                                                                        glass.
5. Rotate bulb m ounting clockwise and
   engage. Insert bulb housing and                                                   4. Insert light insert and secure using a
   engage.                                                                              screwdriver.




                                                                                                                                 211
Courtes y light,                               2. Press bulb slig htly towards spring c lip   Front courte sy light and
re ar reading lights 3,                           and remove.                                 reading lights 3
luggage compartment lights                     3. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the      To ensure that no power is supp lied to the
To ensure that no power is supplied to the        glass.                                      lights, close the doors before removing.
lights, close the d oors or hold the contact
                                               4. Insert light in opening a nd engage in      1. Lever lens out of housing.
switch depressed before rem ov ing.
                                                  position.
1. Prise lig ht out of recess using a
   screwdriver.




212
                                        Instrum ent illumination,
                                        information dis play illumination 3
                                        We rec om mend that you have bulbs
                                        cha ng ed b y your Vauxhall Authorised
                                        Repairer.




2. Remove bulb from socket.
3. Insert new bulb.
4. Mount lens and engage in position.




                                                                                 213
If you have a problem                         the department c oncerned.                         They w ill review all the facts involved. Then
                                                                                                 if it is felt some further action can be tak en,
                                              The majority of areas of concern can be
                                                                                                 the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will b e
                                              quic kly resolved in this way.
                                                                                                 adv ised accordingly. In any case, y our
                                              Should you wish to pursue the matter               contact will b e ac knowledged confirm ing
                                              further, the Principal of the Vauxhall             Vauxhall Motors’ position in the m atter.
                                              Authorised Repairer should be made
                                                                                                 If y ou are not satisfied with the outcome,
                                              aware of your concern. It is ad visab le in
                                                                                                 y ou ca n if you wish, seek advice from an
                                              cases such as this to write to him to confirm
                                                                                                 independent third p arty suc h as:
                                              your problem and the solutions that have
                                              been offered.                                      Autom obile Association (A. A. )
                                                                                                 Fanum House,
                                              You can be assured the Authorised
                                                                                                 BASI NGSTO KE,
                                              Repairer’s Principal w ill only be too anxious
                                                                                                 Hants., R G21 2EA
                                              to fully inv estigate y our prob lems and
                                              correct any errors m ade. After a ll, he has a     Royal Autom obile Cl ub (R.A.C .),
                                              large investm ent in his business and is           R.A. C. M otoring S ervices Ltd.,
In our ex perience the m ost comm on ca use   proud of his reputation and                        89-91 Pall Mall,
of all comp la ints is the result of          professionalism and fully realises that            LON DON , SW1Y S 45
misundersta nding or la ck of                 satisfied c ustomers are his k ey to success.
communication between the customer and                                                           The Customer Relations Dep artment,
the Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer.            In the unlikely ev ent that you are still not      Soc iet y of Mot or Manufact ur ers and
                                              ha ppy with the answer your Vauxhall               Trad ers Ltd. (S .M.M. T.),
We sincerely hope you will nev er have        Authorised Repairer has given, or the              Forbes House, H alkin Street,
cause to c om plain about your vehicle.       action he prop oses to correct the problem,        LON DON , SW1X 7DS
However, if things do g o wrong, the b est    you may conta ct the C ustomer Care
course of action for you to take is to                                                           C ustomer Complaints Service,
                                              Department 1) w here a team of Custom er
contact your Vauxhall Authorised                                                                 Sc ottish Motor Tra de Associ ation,
                                              Care Consultants will spare no effort to
Repairer’s Service Rec eption Staff and                                                          (S. M.T.A.),
                                              ensure your complete satisfa ction.
explain the d ifficulty y ou are having. We                                                      3 Palmerston Place,
are confident they will do their utmost to    Va uxhall Motors Lt d.                             EDINBURGH, EH 12 5AQ
resolve the problem to y our comp lete        Customer Ca re,                                    The National Conciliation Serv ice,
satisfaction.                                 Griffin House,                                     Retai l Motor I ndust ry Federation,
                                              Osborne Road,
Sometimes, however, despite the b est of                                                         9 North Street,
                                              LUTO N,
intentions of all c oncerned,                                                                    RUGBY , C V21 2AB
                                              Beds., LU1 3YT
misundersta ndings can occur. If your         Telep hone: 01582 427200                           I f you hav e a problem w hilst ab road:The
problem has not been resolv ed to your                                                           S ervice Depa rtm ents of Adam O pel AG
satisfaction, please mak e an app ointment    1)                                                 and General M otors branches every where
                                                   Calls ma y be mo nito red and recorded fo r
to discuss the matter with the Manager of          tra in in g p urp oses.                       will provid e information and assistance:


214
Opel Austria Vertriebs GmbH              ADAM OPEL AG                        General Motors Norge AS
Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59                Bahnhofsplatz 1                     Kjeller-Vest 6
1220 Vienna – Austria                    65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany         2027 Kjeller – Norway
Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or              Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or        Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04
00 43-1-2 88 77 0                        00 49-61 42-7 70                    General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.
Opel Belgium N.V.                        General Motors Hellas S .A.         Domaniewska 41
Prins Boudewijnlaan 30                   56 K ifisias Avenue & Delfon str.   06-672 Warsaw – Poland
2550 Kontich – Belgium                   Amarousion                          Tel. 00 48-22-606 17 00
Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 11                   151 25 Athens – Greece              General Motors Portugal
Opel C & S spol. s. r.o.                 Tel. 00 30-1-6 80 65 01             Quinta da Fonte
Na Pankráci 26                           Opel Southeast Europe Ltd.          Edificío Fernão Magalhães, Piso 2
140 00 Prague 4 – Czech Republic         Szabadsag utca 117                  2780-190 Paço d’Arcos – Portugal
Tel. 00 420-2-61 21-88 21                2040 Budaörs – Hungary              Tel. 00 351-21 440 75 00
General Motors Danmark                   Tel. 00 36-23 446 100               General Motors España S.L.
Jaegersborg Alle 4                       General Motors I ndia               Paseo de la Castellana, 91
2920 C harlottenlund – Denmark           Six th Floor, Tower A               28046 Madri d – Spain
Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00                   Global Business Park                Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25
Vauxhall Motors Ltd.                     Mehrauli – Gurgaon Road             Saab Opel Sverige AB
Customer Care                            Gurgaon 122 022, Haryana – India    Esbogatan 8
Griffin House, Osborne Road              Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333             164 74 Kista – Sweden
Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT – England   Opel Ireland Ltd.                   Tel. 00 46-8-632 85 00
Tel. 00 44-15 82-42 72 00                Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road   General Motors Suisse S.A.
General Motors Finland Oy                Sandyford, Dublin 18 – Ireland      Stelzenstraße 4
Pajuniityntie 5                          Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00             8152 Glattbrugg – Swit zerland
00320 Helsinki – Finland                 General Motors I talia Srl          Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80
Tel. Helsinki 00 358-61 58 81            Piazzale dell’Industria 40          Opel Türkiye Ltd. S ti.
General Motors France                    00144 Rome – Italy                  Kemalpasa yolu üzeri
1 – 9, avenue du Marais                  Tel. 00 39-6-5 46 51                35861 Torbali/Izmir – Turkey
Angle Quai de Bezons                     Opel Nederland B.V.                 Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53
95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France          Lage Mosten 49 – 63                 In Al bania, Bosnia -Her zegovi na ,
Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 00                 4822 NK Breda – Netherlands
                                         Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 88 00            Bulga ria, C roatia , Macedonia ,
                                                                             Rom ania, S lovenia and Yugosla via
                                                                             please contact the Opel
                                                                             S ervice Depa rtm ent in Budaörs – Hungary
                                                                             Tel. 00 36-23 446 100




                                                                                                                    215
Maintenance,        In order to guarantee econom ical and safe
                    vehicle operation and to m ainta in the
inspection system   value of y our v ehicle, it is of vital
                    importanc e that all maintenance work is
                    carried out at the proper intervals as
                    specified b y Vauxhall .
                    The oil change and service intervals are
                    flexible, based on a number of different
                    parameters and the conditions under
                    whic h the vehic le is used. Various engine-
                    specific data is continuously recorded and
                    used to calculate the rem aining distance
                    until the next serv ice is due.



                                                                   The remaining distance c an be shown on
                                                                   the speedometer display when the ig nition
                                                                   is switched off and the total milea ge
                                                                   odometer is off: Press the reset button of
                                                                   the trip odometer for 2 second s. InsP and
                                                                   the remaining distance will be display ed.
                                                                   If the rema ining d istance is less than 1000
                                                                   miles (1500 k m), InsP is displayed with a
                                                                   remaining distance of 600 m iles (1000 k m)
                                                                   after the ignition is switched on and off.
                                                                   I nsP is displayed for several seconds if the
                                                                   remaining distance is less tha n 300 miles
                                                                   (500 km ). Have the nec essary service work
                                                                   carried out within one week or 300 miles
                                                                   (500 km ). Entrust this work to a n Vauxhall
                                                                   Authorised Repa irer in order to avoid loss
                                                                   of warranty claims.




216
The serv ice interv al display tak es account
of off-the-road periods during which the
battery is disconnected.
Further information on maintenance and
the inspec tion system can be found in the
service booklet, which is in the glove
compartment.
Hav e maintenance work, as well as repairs
to the body work and units, carried out by a
professional. We recom mend y our
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is
familiar with Vauxhall vehicles and in
possession of the nec essary sp ecial tools
and the latest service instructions from
Vauxhall. In order to avoid invalida tion of
any w arranty claim, it is especially           A note on safety                                N ever carry out any repairs or adjustment
important to entrust work to a Vauxhall         Alw ays switch ignition off w hen perform ing   and m aintenance work on the vehicle
Authorised Repairer during the warranty         checks in the engine c om partment (e.g.        y ourself. This especially applies to the
period. For further information, see the        checking the brake fluid level or the engine    eng ine, chassis and safety parts. You may
Service Booklet.                                oil level) due to risk of injury from live      unwittingly infringe the p rov isions of the
                                                cables and rotating pa rts.                     law and, by not performing the work
Separ ate anti-cor rosion servi ce
                                                                                                properly , endanger y ourself and other
Hav e this service performed once a year,
                                                 The cooling fan is controlled by a             road users.
either as part of an Annua l Inspection or
                                                 thermoswitch and ca n therefore start
separately – see Serv ice Booklet. To av oid
                                                 unexp ectedly even if the ignition is          Checking and topping up fluids
invalidation of any warranty claim against
                                                 switched off. Risk of injury.                  To aid identification, the cap s used when
rust-throug h, we recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.                                                      topping up engine oil, coolant and wash
                                                 Electronic ignition systems generate very
                                                                                                fluid as w ell as the oil d ip stick are coloured
                                                 high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
                                                                                                y ellow.
                                                 system; hig h voltage can be fatal.




                                                                                                                                             217
Engine oil                                        Engine oil l ev el chec k,                         To check oil level, wipe off the dipstic k and
Information on engine oils is found in the        topping up engine oil                              insert it up to the stop mark on the handle.
Service Booklet.                                  The illustrations show chec king and               Top up oil if the level ha s fallen to the MIN
                                                  top ping up of various petrol and diesel           ma rk .
Eng ine oi l level and consum ption               engines.
All engines c onsume oil for technica l                                                              The oil level must not go above the upper
rea sons. The engine oil consump tion ca n        The oil lev el m ust be check ed with the          ma rk MAX on the dipstick. Ex cess oil must
only be assessed after d riv ing a long           vehicle horizontal and with the engine             be dra ined or extracted by suction. If the oil
distance, and may be above the specified          (w hich m ust be at operating temp erature)        level does go above the mark MAX there is
value during the initial stage (run-in            switched off. Wait at least five minutes           a risk of damage to the engine or ca ta ly tic
period). Frequent driving a t hig h revs          before checking the level to allow the             converter.
causes oil consumption to increa se.              normal oil accumulation in the engine to           The amount filled must be between the
                                                  drain back into the oil pan.
In vehicles with engine oil level chec k 3, the                                                      MI N and MA X marks – see pag e 254.
engine oil lev el is check ed automa tic ally –    Im porta nt : I t is the owner’s responsibility
see page 32. It is particularly adv isable to      to maintain the correct level of a n
check the engine oil level before embarking        appropriate quality oil in the engine.
on a long journey.




218
When topping up, use the same brand of       Oil c hange, oil fil ter change
                                                                                         Used oil filters and empty oil containers
oil that was used d uring the previous oil   Change the oil at the disp la yed service
                                                                                         should not be disp osed of as domestic
change. Ob serve the inform ation in the     intervals.
                                                                                         refuse. We recomm end that y ou entrust
Service Booklet.                             We rec om mend that you use genuine         oil and oil filter changes to a Va ux ha ll
Ca pacities – see p age 254.                 Vauxhall oil filters.                       Authorised Repa irer, who is familiar with
                                                                                         legal requirem ents reg arding disposa l of
                                                                                         used oil and can thus help to p rotect
                                                                                         both the env ironment and your hea lth.




                                                                                                                                 219
Diese l fue l filter                             Coolant
Check the fuel filter for any water residue      During operation the system is pressurised.
during ea ch engine oil cha nge. We              The temp erature ma y therefore rise briefly
recom mend tha t you consult your Vauxhall       to ov er 100 °C.
Authorised Repairer.                             The glycol-ba sed coolant provides
Hav e filter checked at shorter intervals in     exc ellent corrosion protection for the
the c ase of ex treme opera ting conditions      heating and cooling systems as well as
suc h a s high humidity (prima rily in coastal   anti-freeze protection down to ap prox .
areas), extremely high or low outside            –28 ° C. I t rema ins in the cooling system
tem peratures and substantially varying          throughout the year and need not b e
day tim e a nd nig ht-time tem peratures.        cha ng ed.
                                                 Use of certain a ntifreezes c an lead to
                                                 engine dam age. We therefore rec om mend
                                                 that you use antifreez es that have been
                                                 approved by Vauxhall.
                                                                                                Anti freeze a nd corrosion prot ect ion
                                                  Antifreeze is a d ang er to health; it must   Before the sta rt of the cold weather season,
                                                  therefore be kept in the original             have the coolant checked for correct
                                                  container and out of the reach of             concentration using a calibrated
                                                  children.                                     hydrometer. We recom mend that you
                                                                                                consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer.
                                                                                                The anti-freeze content must guarantee
                                                                                                frost protection down to approx. –28 °C . An
                                                                                                insufficient concentration will reduce frost
                                                                                                and corrosion protection. Add anti-freez e if
                                                                                                nec essary .
                                                                                                If c oolant loss is topped up with wa ter,
                                                                                                have concentration check ed a nd add
                                                                                                antifreeze if necessary.




220
                                                  Top up antifreez e. I f no antifreeze is         C ool ant temp era ture
                                                  available, top up w ith c lean tap water. If     For physical reasons, the engine
                                                  tap water is unav ailable, distilled water       temperature gauge shows the coolant
                                                  can be used.                                     temperature only if the coolant level is
                                                                                                   adequate.
                                                  After topping up w ith tap or distilled water,
                                                  ha ve the antifreez e concentration              During operation the system is pressurised.
                                                  checked, a nd antifreeze added if                The tem perature may therefore rise to ov er
                                                  necessary. H ave the cause of the coolant        100 ° C.
                                                  loss remedied. We recommend that you             If the temp erature g auge enters the red
                                                  consult your Vaux hall Authorised Rep airer.     zone, check the coolant level immediately.
                                                  When closing, tighten coola nt filler cap as     z Coolant level low:
                                                  fa r as it will go.                                  Top up coolant. Pay attention to the
                                                                                                       instructions given under "Antifreeze and
                                                                                                       corrosion protection" and " Coolant
                                                                                                       level". Have the cause of coolant loss
Coola nt level                                                                                         remedied . We recommend that you
Hardly any losses occur since the cooling                                                              consult your Vauxhall Authorised
system is sealed and it is thus rarely                                                                 Repairer.
necessary to top up the c oolant.                                                                  z Coolant level O K:
The c oolant in the compensation tank                                                                Have the c ause of inc reased coolant
should b e slightly above the mark KALT/                                                             temperature remed ied. Consult a
CO LD with the cooling sy stem cold. It rises                                                        workshop. We rec om mend your
when the engine is w arm a nd falls ag ain as                                                        Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
it cools. If it drops below the marking in this
case, it should be topped up to a lev el just
above the marking.

 Allow engine to cool d ow n before
 removing coola nt filler ca p. Remove filler
 cap carefully so that p ressure can
 escape slowly, otherwise there is a risk of
 scalding.




                                                                                                                                              221
Brake fluid                                    Windscre en wiper                                If the w ip er become frozen on to the glass,
Brake fluid is hy groscopic, i.e. it absorbs   Clea r vision is essential for safe driv ing.    we rec om mend that they be released with
water. If the brakes b ecome hot, suc h as                                                      the aid of Vauxhall De-icer Spray .
                                               The cleaning effect of the windscreen wiper
when d riv ing on long downhill stretches,                                                      S mearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with
                                               and the windscreen washing sy stem 3
vap our bubb les can occur in the w ater,                                                       a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen
                                               should therefore be checked at regular
which can have an extrem ely adverse                                                            Wash Solvent.
                                               intervals. We recommend repla cing the
effect on braking power (depending on the      wiper b la des at least once a yea r.            Wiper blades whose lips have become
proportion of w ater).
                                               If the windscreen is dirty, operate the          hardened, crack ed or covered with silicone
The fluid change intervals specified in the                                                     must be replac ed. This may be necessary
                                               wind screen wash system before switching
Service Booklet m ust therefore be                                                              as a result of the effects of ic e, thawing salt
                                               on the windscreen wiper or setting the
observed.                                                                                       or hea t, or the incorrect use of cleaning
                                               wiper to automatic operation with the rain
                                               sensor 3. This will avoid w iper blad e wear.    agents.
 We recom mend that y ou ha ve brake
 fluid changed by a Va ux ha ll Authorised     Do not switch on the wind screen wiper or        S witc h off w indscreen wiper or autom atic
 Repairer, who will be familiar with the       set them to automa tic operation with the        wiper system w ith rain sensor 3 in ca r
 requirements of the law as regards            ra in sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up as   washes – see pages 17, 228.
 disposal of brake fluid and can thus help     this could dama ge the wiper b la des or the     Windscreen wiper blade maintenance – see
 to protect the environment and your           wiper system .                                   pag e 230.
 health.




222
To ensure proper operation of the ra in        Wi per blad es on the wind sc reen         Wiper bl ade on the rear wind ow 3
sensor 3, the sensor a rea must be free from   Lift wiper arm. Move relea se lev er and   Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper blade as
dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen w ash       detach w ip er blad e.                     show n in illustration a nd remove.
system m ust also be operated at regular
intervals and the sensor a rea m ust be de-
iced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 ca n be
identified by the sensor area near the top
of the w indscreen.




                                                                                                                                223
Winds creen and headlight                       The windscreen wash system and                Battery
wash systems 3                                  headlight wash system w ill not freeze in     The battery is m aintenance-free.
Reservoir for wind screen wash and rear         winter:
windscreen wash at driver’ s side in engine                                                    We recom mend ha ving the ba ttery
compartment.                                      Frost protection     M ix ture – Vauxhall    chang e ca rried out by a Vauxhall
                                                      down to          Windscreen Wash         Authorised Repa irer, who will be fam ilia r
In vehicles with head lig ht washing                                     S olv ent: Water      with the requirements of the law as
system 3, the filler opening is in the engine
                                                       – 5 °C                   1 :3           regards disposa l of old batteries and
compartment behind the right-hand                                                              can thus help to p rotect the env ironment
head lig ht – see Fig. 14246 S .                       – 10 °C                 1 :2
                                                                                               and your health.
Fill only with clean w ater to prevent the             – 20 °C                 1 :1
nozzles from clogging. To improve                      – 30 °C                 2 :1           Retrofitted electrical or electronic
cleaning efficiency, we recommend that                                                        acc essories can p lace an additional load
you add a little Vauxhall Wind screen Wash      When closing the reservoir, p ress the lid    on the battery or even discha rg e the
Solvent.                                        firmly over the beaded ed ge a ll the way     battery. We recom mend that y ou consult a
                                                round.                                        Vauxhall Authorised Repairer regarding
                                                                                              technical possibilities, suc h as fitting a
                                                                                              more powerful battery.




224
Parking the vehicle for more than 4 weeks      Protecting electronic com pone nts              To av oid damaging the vehic le, d o not
can lead to ba ttery discharging. This may     In order to prevent faults in electronic        ma ke a ny modifications to the electrical
red uce the service life of the b attery.      components in the electrica l sy stem, nev er   system, e. g. c onnec ting additional
Disconnect battery from on-board power         connect or disconnect battery with engine       consum ers or tampering with electronic
sup ply by disconnecting the neg ativ e        running or ignition switched on. Never start    control units (chip tuning).
term inal (Vauxhall alarm sy stem 3 is then    engine w ith b attery disconnected, e.g.
disabled ).                                    when starting using jump leads.                  Electronic ignition system s generate very
                                                                                                hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition
Ensure that ignition is switched off before                                                     sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal.
connecting battery. Then perform the
follow ing actions:                                                                            Disconnecting/connecting the b attery
z Set da te and time in information d isplay                                                   from /t o the electr ical syst em
  – see page 39.                                                                               Disconnect the b attery from the vehic le
                                                                                               electrical system before charging : First
z If necessary, activate window
                                                                                               detach the negative and then the positive
  elec tronics 3 – see page 104.
                                                                                               lead. Do not reverse the polarity of the
z Calibrate steering angle sensor (ESP) 3 –                                                    battery, i. e. do not confuse the terminals
  see pa ge 151.                                                                               for the p ositive and neg ativ e leads. When
In order to prev ent the b attery from                                                         connecting, sta rt with the positiv e lead and
discharging , som e c onsumers suc h as the                                                    then c onnec t the neg ative lead.
courtesy light automatically switch off
after approx. 30 minutes.




                                                                                                                                         225
Ve hicle decom mis sioning                       Vehicle storag e                                V ehicle recomm issioning
O bserve na tional regulations.                  z Park v ehicle in dry and well-ventilated      O bserve national regulations.
                                                   premises. With manua l transmission,
If the vehicle is decomm issioned for several                                                    Perform the following work before
                                                   eng age first gear or reverse gear. With
months, the follow ing work must be ca rried       Easy tronic 3 , place selector lever in mid   recommissioning the vehicle:
out in order to prevent damage. We                 position b efore switching off ignition.      z Connect ba ttery – see page 224.
recom mend tha t you consult your Vauxhall         With autom atic transmission 3, place
Authorised Repairer.                                                                             z Check tyre pressure and correc t if
                                                   selector lever in P. Place wheel choc ks or     necessary – see page 249.
z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see              suc hlike under wheels to prev ent vehic le
  page 228.                                        from rolling away .                           z Fill up w indscreen wash system – see
                                                                                                   page 224.
z Check preserv ation in engine                  z Do not apply hand brake.
  com partment a nd on underbody a nd                                                            z Check engine oil level – see p age 218.
                                                 z Disconnect battery by disengaging
  rectify where necessary .                        neg ativ e terminal from vehicle electrical   z Check the coolant level ; top up with anti-
z Clean and preserv e rubber seals on              system – see page 224.                          freez e if necessa ry – see pa ge 221.
  bonnet and doors.                                                                              z Fit the num ber p la te if necessary .
z Change engine oil – see page 219.
z Check antifreeze and c orrosion
  protection – see page 220.
z Check the coola nt level, top up with anti-
  freeze if nec essary – see pag e 221.
z Empty windsc reen w ash system and
  headlight wash system.
z Inc rease ty re pressure to value sp ecified
  for full load – see page 249.




226
Vehicle care   Obtain adv ice from a Vauxhall Authorised
               Repairer regarding cleaning materials tha t
                                                                  V ehicle care aids 3
                                                                  Vehicle wash:
               ha ve b een tested a nd recomm ended by            z Wa sh brush
               Vauxhall.                                          z Shampoo
               When caring for your vehicle, observe all          z Sponge
               na tional environm ental reg ulations,             z Insect Removal S ponge
               particula rly when wa shing it.                    z Chamois

               Regular, thorough care helps to improve            Vehicle care:
               the appearance of your vehicle and                 z Paintwork Clea ner
               maintain its v alue over the y ears. It is a lso   z Paintwork Polish
               prereq uisite for w arra nty claims for any        z Metallic Paintwork Wax
               paint or corrosion damag e. The following          z Hard wa x
               pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if      z Vauxhall Touch-Up Paint
               used properly , will help combat the               z Vauxhall Touch-Up/Aerosol Paint
               unav oida ble d amaging effects of the             z Wheel Preserver
               environment.                                       z Insect Remover
                                                                  z Window Cleaner
                                                                  z Vauxhall Windscreen Wa sh S olv ent
                                                                  z Silicone O il for Rubber Sea ls
                                                                  z Cleaner




                                                                                                          227
Washing                                         Clea n edges and folds on op ened doors        P olishing
The paintwork of your v ehicle is exposed to    and flaps as well a s the area s they cover.   Polishing is necessary only if the pa int has
env ironmenta l influences, e. g. continuous    Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the       become dull or if solid deposits hav e
changes in weather conditions, ind ustrial      vehicle. Rinse leather frequently . Use        become attached to it.
waste gases and dust or tha wing sa lts, so     separate leathers for paint and w indow        Paintwork polish with silicone forms a
wash and wax your v ehicle regularly. When      surfaces: remnants of wax on the wind ow s     protec tiv e film, making w axing
using a utoma tic car washes, select a          will impair vision.                            unnecessary.
programme which includes wax ing.
                                                Observ e national regulations.                 Plastic body parts should not be treated
Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen                                                    with wax and polish.
and the like should be cleaned off              Waxing
immediately , as they contain aggressive                                                       Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles
                                                Wax your vehicle regularly, in pa rticular
constituents which can cause paint                                                             with a metallic-effect paint finish.
                                                after it has been washed using shampoo
dam age.                                        and at the latest when wa ter no longer
                                                                                               Whe els
When using c ar washes, follow the relevant     forms beads on the pa intwork, otherwise
                                                the paintwork will d ry out.                   Use a pH-neutral w heel c leaning agent to
instructions of the car wash facility. The
                                                                                               clean the wheels.
windscreen wiper or a utomatic wiper            Also wax edg es a nd folds on op ened doors
system w ith rain sensor 3 and the rea r        and flaps as well a s the area s they cover.   Wheels a re painted and ca n be treated
window wiper 3 m ust be switched off – see                                                     with the same ag ents as the body. For alloy
page 18. Rem ove the aerial 3 and the roof                                                     wheels we recomm end use of Alloy Wheel
rack 3.                                                                                        Preserv er.
If y ou w ash y our v ehicle by hand, make
sure that the insides of the wing s a re also
thoroughly rinsed out.




228
Paintwork damage                               Plastic and rubber parts                          Interior and upholste ry
Repair small area s of p aint damage suc h     If the carw ash does not c lean plastic and       C lean the vehicle interior, including the
as stone impacts, scratches etc.               rubb er parts adequately , use cleaner            instrument panel fascia, using interior
immediately using a Va ux ha ll touch-up       suitable for vehicle interiors. Do not use a ny   cleaner.
applicator or Vauxhall sp ra y and touch-up    other agent, and in particular do not use         C lean fabric upholstery w ith a vacuum
paint before rust can form . If rust has       solvents or petrol.                               cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use
alrea dy formed, ha ve the c ause remedied.    Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners on         cleaner tha t is suitable for both fabrics and
We recommend that you consult y our            wheels and tyres.                                 vinyl.
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Please also
pay attention to surfaces and edg es                                                             Do not use cleaning agents suc h as
                                               Wheels and tyres                                  acetone, c arbon tetrachlorid e, paint
beneath the v ehicle where which rust ma y
                                               Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners on         thinner, paint remover, nail varnish
have form ed unnoticed for some time.
                                               wheels and tyres.                                 remover, washing pow der or b leach to
Exterior lights                                                                                  clean fabrics, carpets, the dashboard or
Headlight and other protective lig ht bezels                                                     leather trim 3 in the vehicle interior. Petrol
are made of plastic. If they require                                                             is also unsuitable.
additional cleaning after the vehicle has
been washed, clea n them with C ar                                                               Seat belts
Shamp oo. Do not use any ab ra sive or                                                           Alway s k eep seat b elts clean a nd dry.
caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper,                                                       C lean only with lukewarm w ater or Cleaner.
and do not clean them dry.




                                                                                                                                              229
Windows                                         Windscre en wiper blades                        Engine compartme nt
When cleaning the heated rea r window 3,        Wax , such as that used in car washes, can      C lean painted surfaces in the engine
mak e sure tha t the heating element on the     cause streaks to form on the w indscreen        compa rtm ent like any other painted
inside of the wind ow is not d amaged.          when the w iper are used.                       surfac e.
Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather   Smearing wiper blades can be c leaned with      For best results, wash and wax the engine
in conjunction with Wind ow Cleaner and         a soft c loth and Vauxhall Windscreen           compa rtm ent before and after winter.
Insect Remover.                                 Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary –       Before washing the engine, cov er the
                                                see p age 222.                                  alternator and brake fluid reservoir with
Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is
                                                                                                plastic sheeting.
suitab le for de-icing windows.
                                                Locks                                           When washing the engine with a steam-
For mechanical removal of ice, use a            The locks are lubricated with a hig h-grad e    jet cleaner, do not direct the steam jet
commercially a vailable sharp-edged ice         lock cylinder grease at the fac tory .          at c om ponents of the Anti-lock Brake
scraper. Press the sc ra per firmly against     Vauxhall lock cylinder grease prevents the      S ystem 3 , the a utoma tic air conditioning
the g lass so that no dirt can get und er it    lock s from freezing up. O nly use de-ic ing    system 3 or the belt drive and its
and scratch the glass.                          agent in emerg encies, a s they have a          components.
                                                degreasing effect a nd will impair the
                                                function of the locks. After using a de-icing   Protective wax that has been applied is
                                                agent, hav e the locks re-greased. We           also rem ov ed during the engine wash. For
                                                recommend that you entrust this to y our        this reason, have the engine, brake sy stem
                                                Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.                   components in the engine c om partment,
                                                                                                ax le components with steering , body parts
                                                                                                and c avities thoroughly preserved with
                                                                                                protec tiv e w ax after the wash. We
                                                                                                recommend that y ou consult y our Vauxhall
                                                                                                Authorised Repa irer.
                                                                                                An eng ine wash can be performed in the
                                                                                                spring in order to remove dirt that has
                                                                                                adhered to the engine compartment,
                                                                                                which ma y also have a high salt content.
                                                                                                C heck protective wax layer and make good
                                                                                                if nec essary .
                                                                                                Do not use high-pressure jet c leaners on
                                                                                                wheels and tyres.




230
Underbody                                      Folding roof 3                                  z Do not use high-pressure jet c leaners on
Your vehicle has a fa ctory -applied PVC       The operation, ap pearance and service life       wheels a nd tyres.
undercoating in the wheel arches               of the folding roof mainly depend on            z Remov e bird droppings im med ia tely.
(includ ing the longitudinal members) w hich   correct opera tion and cleaning.
provides permanent protection and needs                                                        z Do not use aggressive cleaning agents
                                               Brush clea n in front to rear direction using     or stain removers.
no special m aintenance. The surfaces of       soft brush (dry ).
the vehicle underbody not covered b y PVC                                                      z With roof open, clean slide rails a nd
are provided with a durable protective w ax    Rinse with clean w ater.                          sliding p arts and grease with acid-free
coating in critical areas.                     In case of heavy soiling: Brush roof in one       grease once per annum . C lean rubber
                                               direction with car shampoo and lukewarm           parts as described in "Plastic and Rubber
O n vehicles which are washed frequently in
automatic car washes with underbody            water. Rinse with clean w ater.                   Parts" – page 229.
washing facility , the protective wax          Alw ays wash the entire roof.                   z Check wind deflector water drains for
coating may be imp aired by dirt-dissolving                                                      blockages and clean if necessary.
additives, so check the underbody after        Allow wet roof to dry – keep closed.
                                                                                               z Do not remove snow and ice using sharp
washing and have it wax ed if necessary.
                                                                                                 objects.
Before the start of the cold weather season,
check the PVC coating and protective wax
coating and, if necessary, hav e them
restored to perfec t cond ition.
Ca ution – com mercially available bitumen/
rubber materials can d amage the PVC
coating. We recomm end that y ou hav e
underbody work carried out by a Vaux hall
Authorised Repairer, who knows the
prescribed materials a nd has experience in
the use thereof.
The underbody should be washed
follow ing the end of the cold w eather
season to remove any dirt adhering to the
underbody since this may also contain salt.
Check protectiv e w ax coating a nd, if
necessary, have it restored to p erfect
condition.




                                                                                                                                      231
Technical data




                 Vehicle docum ents, identification               In other versions the ty pe plate is attached
                 plate                                            to the right spring strut dome in the engine
                 The tec hnical d ata is determined in            compa rtm ent.
                 accordance with European C ommunity
                 standards. We reserve the right to make
                 modifications. S pecifications in the vehic le
                 docum ents alwa ys have priority ov er those
                 given in this Ow ner’s Manual.

                 The identification plate is affix ed to the
                 front right door frame.




232
                                                                                                   Coolant, brake fluid, oils
                                                                                                   When topping up
                                                                                                   – coola nt,
                                                                                                   – brake fluid,
                                                                                                   – manual transmission oil,
                                                                                                   – autom atic transmission oil
                                                                                                   we rec om mend that you consult your
                                                                                                   Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can
                                                                                                   adv ise you on the correct products to use.
                                                                                                   C aution: Use of unsuitable fluids can cause
                                                                                                   serious damage to the vehicle.
                                                                                                   Engine oils
                                                                                                   Information on engine oils is found in the
                                                                                                   S ervice Booklet.

Information on id entific ation p la te:          Vehicle identification data
1   Manufacturer                                  The vehic le identification number is
2   Ty pe approval number                         stamp ed on the id entific ation pla te and in
3   Vehicle identification number                 the vehicle floor on the right-hand sid e
4   Permissible gross vehicle w eight             under a cov er between the front driver’ s
5   Permissible gross train weight                door and seat.
6   Maximum permissible front axle load           In other design v ariants, the identification
7   Maximum permissible rear axle load            plate m ay also be affixed to the
8   Vehicle-sp ecific or country -specific data   dashboard.
                                                  Engine c od e and engine number. Ma rk ed
                                                  on engine b lock at left side of engine in
                                                  petrol engines, and beneath diesel
                                                  injection pum p at right side of engine in
                                                  diesel engines.




                                                                                                                                           233
Engine data
Sales designation                                                    1. 0 TWIN PO RT       1.2 TWIN PORT         1.4              1.4 TWINPOR T   1.8
Eng ine identifier code                                              Z 10 XEP              Z 12 XEP              Z 14 XE          Z 14 XEP        Z 18 XE

Numb er of cylinders                                                 3                     4                     4                4               4
Bore dia. (mm )                                                      73.4                  73.4                  77.6             73. 4           80.5

Stroke (mm)                                                          78.6                  72.6                  73.4             80. 6           88.2
Piston displacement         (cm 3)                                   998                   1229                  1389             1364            1796

Max . engine outp ut (k W)                                           44                    59                    66               66              92
 at rpm                                                              5600                  5600                  6000             5600            6000

Torque (Nm )                                                         88                    110                   125              125             165
  at rpm                                                             3800                  4000                  4000             4000            4600

Com pression ratio                                                   10.5                  10.5                  10.5             10. 5           10.5
O ctane requirement          (RO N) 1 )
  unleaded                                                           95 2 )                95 2 )                95    2)         95    2)        952 )
  or unleaded                                                        98 2 )                982 )                 98    2)         98    2)        98 2 )
  or unleaded                                                        91 2 )3)              91 2 )3)              91    2 )3)      91    2)3 )     91 2 )3)
Max . permissible engine speed,
 continuous operation (rpm ) ap prox .                               6200                  6200                  6500             6200            6500
O il consumption (l/1000 km)                                         0. 6                  0.6                   0.6              0.6             0.6




1)
     Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . unlea ded DIN EN 228; value p rinted in b old: R ecom mend ed fuel.
2)
     Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber).
3)
     Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 91 R ON is used .


234
Engine data
Sales designation                                                                                      1.3 C DTI      1.7 DT         1.7 C DTI
Eng ine identifier code                                                                                Z 13 DT        Y 17 DTL       Z 17 DTH

Numb er of cylinders                                                                                   4              4              4
Bore dia. (mm )                                                                                        69.6           79.0           79.0

Stroke (mm)                                                                                            82.0           86.0           86.0
Piston displacement        (cm 3)                                                                      1248           1686           1686

Max . engine outp ut (k W)                                                                             51             48             74
 at rpm                                                                                                4000           4400           4400

Torque (Nm )                                                                                           170            130            240
  at rpm                                                                                               1750 to 2500   2000 to 3000   2300

Com pression ratio                                                                                     18.0           18.4           18.4
Cetane requirement         (CN) 1 )                                                                    492)           49 2)          49    2)


Max . permissible engine speed,
 continuous operation (rpm) approx.                                                                    5100 to 5300   5100 to 5300   5050 to 5150

O il consumption (l/1000 km)                                                                           0.6            0.6            0.6




1)
     Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . Diesel DIN EN 590; value p rinted in b old: R eco mmend ed fuel.
2)
     A lo wer va lue is pos sib le with w inter diesel fu els.


                                                                                                                                                    235
Pe rform ance (approx. mph; km/h1 )) , Cors a
Eng ine 2 )                                                                         Z 10 XEP EC O3 )       Z 10 XEP            Z 12 XEP            Z 14 XE

Max imum speed
 5-speed ma nual transmission                                                       –                      –                   –                   –
 Sports transmission                                                                –                      97; 156             108;175             –
 Easytronic                                                                         98;159                 97; 156             108;175             –
 Automatic transmission                                                             –                      –                   –                   106;170

Eng ine 2 )                                                                         Z 14 XEP               Z 18 XE             Z 13 DT             Z 17 DTH
Max imum speed
 5-speed ma nual transmission                                                       –                      –                   103;165             117;188
 Sports transmission                                                                111;179                126;202             –                   –
 Easytronic                                                                         110;177                –                   103;165             –
 Automatic transmission                                                             –                      –                   –                   –




Driving values (approx. mph; km /h 1) ), Combo
Eng ine 2 )                                                                         Z 14 XEP               Z 13 DT             Y 17 DTL            Z 17 DTH

Max imum speed
 5-speed ma nual transmission                                                       102;164                92; 150             91;147              106;170




1)
     The ma xim um s peed is a ch ieva ble with a m aximum of h alf p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent m ay reduce th e specified m aximum speed of the vehicle.
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.
3)
     Usa ge-optimised eq uipm ent version, in conjunction with En gine Z 10 XEP.


236
Fuel cons umption,                        The direc tiv e is oriented to actual driving   The figures given m ust not be taken as a
CO2 e mis sions                           practices: Urban driv ing is rated at approx.   guarantee for the actual fuel consumption
                                          1/ and off-road driving with approx . 2 /
Directive 80/1268/EEC (last c hanged by     3                                        3    of a p artic ular vehicle.
1999/100/EC) has ap plied for the         (urban a nd ex tra-urban c onsumption).         The calculation of fuel consumption as
measurement of fuel consumption since     Cold starts and acceleration phases are         spec ified by directive 1999/100/EC takes
1996.                                     also tak en into consideration.                 acc ount of the v ehicle’ s kerb weight,
                                          The specification of CO 2 emission is also a    ascertained in accordance with the said
                                          constituent of the directive.                   regula tion. Optional ex tras may result in
                                                                                          slightly higher fuel consumption and CO 2
                                                                                          emission lev els than those quoted.
                                                                                          To convert l/100 k m into mpg, divide 282
                                                                                          by num ber of litres/100 km.
                                                                                          S aving fuel, p rotecting the environm ent –
                                                                                          see page 140.




                                                                                                                                   237
Fuel cons umption, CO2 emission
Corsa
Eng ine 1 )                                                                  Z 10 XEP         Z 10 XEP        Z 12 XEP         Z 14 XE
                                                                             ECO 2)
Manual/S ports/Easytronic/Automatic transm ission
 Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km )
   Urban                                                                     –/– / 6.3/–      –/ 6.9/ 6.7/–   –/ 7. 8/ 6.8/–   – /–/–/10.4
   Ex tra-urb an                                                             –/– / 3.9/–      –/ 4.4/ 4.3/–   –/ 4. 6/ 4.4/–   – /–/–/ 5.8
   Com bined                                                                 –/– / 4,8/–      –/ 5.3/ 5.2/–   –/ 5. 8/ 5.3/–   – /–/–/ 7.5
 CO 2 emission (app rox . g/km)
   Urban                                                                     –/– /151/–       – /166/161/–    –/187/163/–      – /–/–/ 250
   Ex tra-urb an                                                             –/– / 94/–       – /106/103/–    –/110/106/–      – /–/–/ 139
   Com bined                                                                 –/– /115/–       – /127/125/–    –/139/127/–      – /–/–/ 180

Eng ine 1 )                                                                  Z 14 XEP         Z 18 XE         Z 13 DT          Z 17 DTH
Manual/S ports/Easytronic/Automatic transm ission
 Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km )
   Urban                                                                     –/ 7.9/ 7. 7/–   –/10.8/–/–      5.7/–/ 5.5/–     6.3/–/– /–
   Ex tra-urb an                                                             –/ 4.7/ 4. 5/–   –/ 5.6/– /–     3.8/–/ 3.7/–     3.8/–/– /–
   Com bined                                                                 –/ 5.9/ 5. 7/–   –/ 7.5/– /–     4.5/–/ 4.4/–     4.7/–/– /–
 CO 2 emission (app rox . g/km)
   Urban                                                                     –/190/185/–      –/ 259/–/–      154/– /149/–     170/–/–/–
   Ex tra-urb an                                                             –/113/108/–      –/ 134/–/–      103/– /100/–     108/–/–/–
   Com bined                                                                 –/142/137/–      –/ 179/–/–      122/– /119/–     127/–/–/–




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.
2)
     Usa ge-optimised eq uipm ent version, in conjunction with En gine Z 10 XEP.


238
Fuel cons umption, CO2 Emiss ion
Combo
Eng ine 1 )                                       Z 14 XEP   Z 13 DT   Y 17 DTL   Z 17 DTH

Manual transm ission
 Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km )
   Urban                                          8.0        6.5       6.6        6.6
   Ex tra-urb an                                  5.3        4.3       4.7        4.4
   Com bined                                      6.3        5.1       5.4        5.2
 CO 2 emission (app rox . g/km)
   Urban                                          192        176       178        178
   Ex tra-urb an                                  127        116       127        119
   Com bined                                      151        138       146        140




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


                                                                                             239
Weights, payload and roof load                               The combined total of front a nd rear ax le      General inform ation
The p ayload is the difference between the                   loa ds must not exceed the perm issible          The permissib le roof load is 100 kg . The
permitted g ross vehicle weight (see                         gross vehicle weight. For exa mple, if the       roof load consists of the weight of the roof
identification plate, page 232) and the EC                   front ax le is bearing its m aximum              rack plus the load carried.
kerb weight.                                                 permissib le load, the rear axle can only        Driving hints – see page 138.
                                                             bear a load that is eq ua l to the gross
To calculate the kerb weight, enter the                      vehicle weig ht m inus the front axle load.      Roof rack – see page 165.
data for y our vehicle below:
z Kerb weight from                                           Corsa
  Ta ble 1,                                                  When the carav an/trailer is coupled and
  pages 241 to 247            + ... ..... .... .. kg         the towing vehic le fully loaded (including
                                                             all occupants), the perm issible rear ax le
z Weight of heavy                                            loa d (see identification plate or v ehicle
  accessories from                                           docum ents) may be exceeded by 45 kg
  Ta ble 2,                                                  and the permissible gross vehicle weight by
  page 248                          + ... ..... .... .. kg   15 kg. If the permissib le rear axle load is
The total                           = ... ..... .... .. kg   exc eeded, a max imum speed of
                                                             (60 mph)100 km /h app lies. If national
is the EC k erb w eight.
                                                             regulations specify a lower max im um
O ptional equipment and accessories                          speed for vehicles towing a ca ra van/trailer,
increase the kerb weight, which m eans that                  this must be observed .
the p ayload will also change slig htly.
                                                             See the identification plate or v ehicle
Note the weights given in the vehicle                        docum ents for permissib le ax le loads.
documents.
                                                             Corsava n, Comb o
                                                             The permissible axle loads must not be
                                                             exc eeded.
                                                             See the identification plate or v ehicle
                                                             docum ents for permissib le ax le loads.




240
Weights approx. (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1 ), Corsa
Model                    Eng ine2 )               3-d oor                                                        5-d oor
                                                  Manua l              Ea sytronic          Automatic            Manua l              Easy tronic     Automatic
                                                  tra nsmission                             transmission         tra nsmission                        transmission
Corsa Life ECO           Z 10 XEP                 –                    1030                 –                    –                    1055            –
Corsa Life ECO           Z 10 XEP                 –                    1055                 –                    –                    1080            –
wi th air
condit ioning
system
Corsa Life, C orsa Z 10 XEP                        980                  980                 –                    1005                 1005            –
Expression
                   Z 12 XEP                       1010                 1010                 –                    1035                 1035            –

                         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1075                 –                    –               1100
                         Z 14 XEP                 1035                 1035                 –                    1053                 1053            –

                         Z 13 DT                  1110                 –                    –                    1135                 –               –
                         Z 17 DTH                 1155                 –                    –                    1163                 –               –
Corsa Life, C orsa       Z 10 XEP                 1015                 1015                 –                    1040                 1040            –
Expression
wi th air                Z 12 XEP                 1035                 1035                 –                    1060                 1060            –
condit ioning or         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1100                 –                    –               1125
clim ate control
system                   Z 14 XEP                 1060                 1060                 –                    1078                 1078

                         Z 13 DT                  1135                 –                    –                    1160                 –               –
                         Z 17 DTH                 1180                 –                    –                    1188                 –               –




1)
     According to EC D irective 70/ 156/EC, includ ing a ssum ed w eig hts fo r d river (68 kg ), lug ga ge (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


                                                                                                                                                                     241
Weights approx. (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1), Cors a
Model                    Eng ine2 )               3-d oor                                                        5-d oor
                                                  Manua l              Ea sytronic          Automatic            Manua l              Easy tronic     Automatic
                                                  tra nsmission                             transmission         tra nsmission                        transmission
Corsa                    Z 10 XEP                 1020                 1020                 –                    1045                 1045            –
Acti ve
                         Z 12 XEP                 1040                 1040                 –                    1065                 1065            –
                         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1095                 –                    –               1120

                         Z 14 XEP                 1055                 1055                 –                    1073                 1073            –
                         Z 18 XE                  1110                 –                    –                    1135                 –               –

                         Z 13 DT                  1130                 –                    –                    1155                 –               –
                         Z 17 DTH                 1185                 –                    –                    1193                 –               –
Corsa                    Z 10 XEP                 1045                 1045                 –                    1070                 1070            –
Acti ve
wi th air                Z 12 XEP                 1065                 1065                 –                    1090                 1090            –
condit ioning or         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1120                 –                    –               1145
clim ate control
system                   Z 14 XEP                 1080                 1080                 –                    1098                 1098            –

                         Z 18 XE                  1135                 –                    –                    1160                 –               –
                         Z 13 DT                  1155                 –                    –                    1180                 –               –

                         Z 17 DTH                 1210                 –                    –                    1218                 –               –




1)
     According to EC D irective 70/ 156/EC, includ ing a ssum ed w eig hts fo r d river (68 kg ), lug ga ge (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


242
Weights approx. (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1), Cors a
Model                    Eng ine2 )               3-d oor                                                        5-d oor
                                                  Manua l              Ea sytronic          Automatic            Manua l              Easy tronic     Automatic
                                                  tra nsmission                             transmission         tra nsmission                        transmission
SXi                      Z 12 XEP                 1045                 1045                 –                    1070                 1070            –

                         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1100                 –                    –               1125
                         Z 14 XEP                 1060                 1060                 –                    1078                 1078            –

                         Z 18 XE                  1115                 –                    –                    1140                 –               –
                         Z 13 DT                  1135                 –                    –                    1160                 –               –

                         Z 17 DTH                 1180                 –                    –                    1188                 –               –
SXi                      Z 12 XEP                 1070                 1070                 –                    1095                 1095            –
wi th air
condit ioning or         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1125                 –                    –               1150
clim ate control         Z 14 XEP                 1085                 1085                 –                    1103                 1103            –
system
                         Z 18 XE                  1140                 –                    –                    1165                 –               –
                         Z 13 DT                  1160                 –                    –                    1185                 –               –

                         Z 17 DTH                 1205                 –                    –                    1213                 –               –




1)
     According to EC D irective 70/ 156/EC, includ ing a ssum ed w eig hts fo r d river (68 kg ), lug ga ge (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


                                                                                                                                                                     243
Weights approx. (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1), Cors a
Model                    Eng ine2 )               3-d oor                                                        5-d oor
                                                  Manua l              Ea sytronic          Automatic            Manua l              Easy tronic     Automatic
                                                  tra nsmission                             transmission         tra nsmission                        transmission
Desi gn                  Z 10 XEP                 1030                 1030                 –                    1055                 1055            –

                         Z 12 XEP                 1070                 1070                 –                    1095                 1095            –
                         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1125                 –                    –               1150

                         Z 14 XEP                 1085                 1085                 –                    1103                 1103            –
                         Z 18 XE                  1135                 –                    –                    1160                 –               –

                         Z 13 DT                  1160                 –                    –                    1185                 –               –
                         Z 17 DTH                 1205                 –                    –                    1213                 –               –
Desi gn                  Z 10 XEP                 1055                 1055                 –                    1080                 1080            –
wi th air
condit ioning or         Z 12 XEP                 1095                 1095                 –                    1120                 1120            –
clim ate control         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1150                 –                    –               1175
system
                         Z 14 XEP                 1110                 1110                 –                    1128                 1128            –

                         Z 18 XE                  1160                 –                    –                    1185                 –               –
                         Z 13 DT                  1185                 –                    –                    1210                 –               –

                         Z 17 DTH                 1230                 –                    –                    1238                 –               –




1)
     According to EC D irective 70/ 156/EC, includ ing a ssum ed w eig hts fo r d river (68 kg ), lug ga ge (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


244
Weights approx. (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1), Cors a
Model                    Eng ine2 )               3-d oor                                                        5-d oor
                                                  Manua l              Ea sytronic          Automatic            Manua l              Easy tronic     Automatic
                                                  tra nsmission                             transmission         tra nsmission                        transmission
SRi                      Z 12 XEP                 1070                 1070                 –                    1095                 1095            –

                         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1125                 –                    –               1150
                         Z 14 XEP                 1085                 1085                 –                    1103                 1103            –

                         Z 18 XE                  1130                 –                    –                    1155                 –               –
                         Z 17 DTH                 1205                 –                    –                    1213                 –               –
SRi                      Z 12 XEP                 1095                 1095                 –                    1120                 1120            –
wi th air
condit ioning or         Z 14 XE                  –                    –                    1150                 –                    –               1175
clim ate control         Z 14 XEP                 1110                 1110                 –                    1128                 1128            –
system
                         Z 18 XE                  1155                 –                    –                    1180                 –               –

                         Z 17 DTH                 1230                 –                    –                    1238                 –               –




1)
     According to EC D irective 70/ 156/EC, includ ing a ssum ed w eig hts fo r d river (68 kg ), lug ga ge (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


                                                                                                                                                                     245
Weights approx. (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1 ), Cors avan
Model                    Eng ine2 )               Manua l              Ea sytronic          Automatic
                                                  tra nsmission                             transmission
Corsav an                Z 12 XEP                 1040                 –                    –
                         Z 14 XEP                 1055                 –                    –

                         Z13 DT                   1130                 –                    –
                         Z17 DTH                  1175                 –                    –
Corsav an                Z 12 XEP                 1065                 –                    –
wi th air con.
                         Z 14 XEP                 1080                 –                    –

                         Z13 DT                   1155                 –                    –
                         Z17 DTH                  1200                 –                    –




1)
     According to EC D irective 70/ 156/EC, includ ing a ssum ed w eig hts fo r d river (68 kg ), lug ga ge (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


246
Weights approx. (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1 ), Combo
Model                    Eng ine2 )                                                                          Ma nual
                                                                                                             transmission
Com bo                   Z 14 XEP                                                                            1190
                         Z 13 DT                                                                             1278

                         Y 17 DTL                                                                            1278
                         Z 17 DTH                                                                            1320
Com bo                   Z 14 XEP                                                                            1350
wi th air
condit ioning            Z 13 DT                                                                             1413

                         Y 17 DTL                                                                            1413
                         Z 17 DTH                                                                            1455
Com bo, C ombo           Z 14 XEP                                                                            1235
Crew van
                         Z 13 DT                                                                             1325

                         Y 17 DTL                                                                            1278
                         Z 17 DTH                                                                            1365
Com bo, C ombo           Z 14 XEP                                                                            1265
Crew van
wi th air                Z 13 DT                                                                             1355
condit ioning            Y 17 DTL                                                                            1308
                         Z 17 DTH                                                                            1395




1)
     According to EC D irective 70/ 156/EC, includ ing a ssum ed w eig hts fo r d river (68 kg ), lug ga ge (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


                                                                                                                                                      247
Weights approx. (kg) : Table 2, heavy accessories, Corsa
Accessories      Sun roof       Towi ng        Anti-lock      El ect ronic    Electric    Side air bags   Loa ding floor ma t,
                                equip ment     brak e         pow er steering w indows                    Corsav an
                                               system (ABS)
Weight           18             15             7              8               5           6               7




Weights approx. (kg) : Table 2, heavy accessories, Combo
Accessories      Sun roof       Towi ng        Anti-lock      Sli ding door   Rear vent   Loa d        Spli t load
                                equip ment     brak e         (front          w indows    compa rtment compa rtment
                                               system (ABS)   passenger’s                 grille       grille
                                                              side)
Weight           18             18             7              23              9           8               10




248
Tyres                                             If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel      Whe els
Restricti ons                                     may still be fitted w ith a summ er ty re. Use   Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm.
Not a ll tyres ava ila ble on the market          of the spare w heel may a lter vehicle
                                                                                                   O n vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spa re
currently meet the structural requirem ents.      ha ndling. Obtain a replacement for the
                                                  fa ulty tyre as soon as possible, and hav e      wheel m ay have a steel rim.
We recommend that you consult a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning           the wheel balanced and fitted to the             The spare wheel ma y have a smaller tyre
suitab le tyre mak es.                            vehicle.                                         and a sm aller rim: using the sp are wheel
                                                                                                   ma y cause d ifferent driving behaviour.
These ty res have und ergone special tests        Further inform ation – see page 164.
                                                                                                   Replace d efectiv e tyre as soon as possible,
to establish their reliab ility , safety and                                                       bala nce wheel and hav e it fitted to the
specific suitability for Vaux hall vehicles.      Tyre chains 3
                                                                                                   vehicle.
Despite continuous ma rk et monitoring, we        Ty re c hains may be used on the front
are unab le to assess these attributes for        wheels only.
                                                                                                   Tyre press ure in bar/ ps i2)
other tyres, ev en if they hav e been g ra nted   We recommend the use of Vauxhall-tested          The specified ty re pressure are v alid for
approva l by the relevant authorities or in       fine-mesh chains that add no more than           cold ty res. The increased ty re pressure
som e other form.                                 15 mm to the ty re tread and the inboard         resulting from ex tensiv e d riv ing must not
Further information – see pa ge 160.              sides (including chain lock).                    be reduced. The ty re pressure spec ified on
                                                  Ty re c hains are not permitted on the           the following pages ap ply to both summer
Winter tyre s 3                                   temporary spa re wheel or on tyres of size       and w inter tyres.
Tyre sizes 195/45 R 16 and 205/40 R 17 are        185/60 R 15, 195/45 R 16 and 205/40 R 17.        The spare wheel m ust alway s be filled with
not perm itted for use as winter ty res (M+S
                                                  Ty re c hains are only perm itted on tyres of    the tyre pressure for a full load – see tables
tyres).
                                                  size 185/55 R 15 on vehicles with engine         on follow ing pages.
Tyre siz e 185/55 R 15 is only permitted on       Z 17 DTH1 ) or Com bos in the "increased         Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure – see
vehic les with engine Z 17 DTH1) or Combos        payload" version.                                tables on next pa ge.
in the " increased p ayload" version.
                                                  Further inform ation – see page 164.             Further inform ation – see p ages 160 to 164.
In the case of vehicles with Z 18 XE 1)
engine, size 175/65 R 14 ty res are only
permitted a s w inter tyres (M+S tyres), and
may only be used in the winter months.




1)                                                                                                 2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.                                                         1 ba r corresp on ds to 100 kPa .


                                                                                                                                             249
(ctd.)                       Corsa                                                       Ty re pressure            Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure in bar / psi                                                               for load of               for full load
                                                                                         up to 3 persons
                             Engine1 )                   Ty res                          Front        Rear         Front        Rear
                             Z 10 XEP ECO                155/80 R 13    (M+ S) 2)        2.4/35       2.4/35       2. 7/39      3.0/44
                                                         175/65 R   14 3 )               2.7/39 4)    2.5/36 4 )   2. 7/39      3.0/44
                                                         175/65 R 14 3 )                 2.4/35 5)    2.4/35 5 )   2. 7/39      3.0/44
                             Z 10 XEP                    155/80   R 13,                  2.2/32       1.8/26       2. 4/35      2.8/41
                                                         175/65   R 14,
                                                         185/55   R 156 ),
                                                         195/45   R 16 7 )
                             Z 12 XEP                    155/80   R 13,                  2.2/32       1.8/26       2. 4/35      2.8/41
                                                         175/65   R 14,
                                                         185/55   R 15 6 ),
                                                         195/45   R 16 7 )
                                                         205/40 R 17                     2.4/35       2.2/32       2. 6/38      3.0/44
                             Z 14 XE                     175/65 R 14,                    2.3/33       2.1/30       2. 4/35      2.8/41
                                                         185/55 R 15 6 )
                                                         195/45 R 16 7 ),                2.4/35       2.2/32       2. 6/38      3.0/44
                                                         205/40 R 17
                             Z 14 XEP                    175/65 R 14,                    2.3/33       2.1/30       2. 4/35      2.8/41
                                                         185/55 R 15 6 ),
                                                         195/45 R 16 7 )
                                                         205/40 R 17                     2.4/35       2.2/32       2. 6/38      3.0/44

                             1)
                                  Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 234, 23 5.
                             2)
                                  Us e only in the w in ter months.
                             3)
                                  Only Co ntinen ta l Eco Contact.
                             4)
                                  "ECO" tyre p ress ure for achieving fuel consu mp tion tha t is a s lo w a s po ssible.
                             5)
                                  "COMFORT" tyre pressure for imp roving driving com fort w ith little in crease in fu el co nsum ption.
                             6)
                                  R ecom mend ed: M ichelin XH1, Continental Premium Con ta ct, Firestone FH 700
                                  or Goo dyea r Ea gle Ventu ra , Pirelli P 6 000.
                             7)
                                  R ecom mend ed: D unlop SP Sp ort 900 0, Good year Eag le F1 .


250
(ctd.)                 Corsa                                                   Ty re pressure          Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure in bar                                                           for load of             for full load
                                                                               up to 3 persons
                       Engine1 )                 Ty res                        Front      Rear         Front     Rear
                       Z 14 XEP S Ri             175/65   R 14   (M+ S) 2) ,   2.4/35     2.2/32       2. 6/38   3.0/44
                                                 185/55   R 153 ),
                                                 195/45   R 164 ),
                                                 205/40   R 17
                       Z 18 XE                   175/65 R 14 (M+ S) 2),        2.3/33     2.1/30       2. 4/35   2.8/41
                                                 185/55 R 15 3 )
                                                 195/45 R 16 4 ),              2.6/38     2.4/35       2. 6/38   3.0/44
                                                 205/40 R 17
                       Z 18 XE SRi               175/65 R 14 (M+ S) 2),        2.4/35     2.2/32       2. 6/38   3.0/44
                                                 185/55 R 15 3 ),
                                                 195/45 R 16 4 )
                                                 205/40 R 17                   2.6/38     2.4/35       2. 6/38   3.0/44
                       Z 13 DT                   175/65 R 14,                  2.3/33     2.1/30       2. 4/35   2.8/41
                                                 185/55 R 15 3 )
                                                 195/45 R 16 4 ),              2.4/35     2.2/32       2. 6/38   3.0/44
                                                 205/40 R 17
                       Z 17 DTH                  185/55 R 15 3 )               2.6/38     2.4/35       2. 6/38   3.0/44
                                                 185/60 R 15 5 )               2.4/35     2.2/32       2. 6/38   3.0/44
                                                               4 ),
                                                 195/45 R 16                   2.7/39     2.5/36       2. 7/39   3.0/44
                                                 205/40 R 17



                       1)
                            Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 234, 23 5.
                       2)
                            Us e only in the w in ter months.
                       3)
                            R ecom mend ed: M ichelin XH1, Continental Premium Con ta ct, Firestone FH 700
                            or Goo dyea r Ea gle Ventu ra , Pirelli P 6 000.
                       4)
                            R ecom mend ed: D unlop SP Sp ort 900 0, Good year Eag le F1 .
                       5)
                            R ecom mend ation: Pirelli P 6000, Con tinental ECO CP.


                                                                                                                          251
Tyre pressure in bar   Comb o                                                       Ty re pressure      Tyre pressure
                                                                                    for load of         for full load
                                                                                    up to 2 persons
                                                                                    and 100 kg lugg age

                       Engine1 )                    Ty res                          Front         Rear     Front     Rear

                       Z 14    XEP,                 175/70 R 142 )3) ,              2.4/35        2.4/35   2. 4/35   3.5/51
                       Z 13    DT,                  185/60 R 15,
                       Y 17    DTL,                 185/55 R 15
                       Z 17    DTH

                       all                          T 115/70 R 16                   4.2/61        4.2/61   4. 2/61   4.2/61




                       Comb o, Comb i                                               Ty re pressure         Tyre pressure
                                                                                    for load of            for full load
                                                                                    up to 3 persons

                       Engine1 )                    Ty res                          Front         Rear     Front     Rear

                       Z 14    XEP,                 175/70   R  144 ),              2.4/35        2.4/35   2. 4/35   3.5/51
                       Z 13    DT,                  185/60   R 155 ),
                       Y 17    DTL,                 185/55   R 15,
                       Z 17    DTH                  195/50   R 16

                                                    195/45 R 16 6 )                 2.5/36        2.5/36   2. 5/36   3.5/51

                       all                          T 115/70 R 16                   4.2/61        4.2/61   4. 2/61   4.2/61




                       1)
                            Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 234, 23 5.
                       2)
                            N ot permitted in vers io n with "increased pa ylo ad ".
                       3)
                            R ecom mend ation: Du nlop SP 10 , Firestone F 580, Pirelli P 3000.
                       4)
                            R ecom mend ation: Michelin Agilis 4 1, Co ntinen ta l Va ncoContact.
                       5)
                            R ecom mend ed: P irelli P 6000 , Co ntinenta l ECO CP , Co ntinen ta l CPC.
                       6)
                            N ot on vehicles with eng in e Z 17 DTH .


252
Ele ctrical system

Battery        Voltage              12 Volt

               Amp hours            36 Ah / 44 Ah 3 / 55 Ah 3 / 60 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3

Battery for radio rem ote control   C R 20 32




                                                                                    253
Capacities (app rox . in litres)
Eng ine 1 )                                       Z 10 XEP   Z 12 XEP   Z 14 XE   Z 14 XEP   Z 18 XE

Cooling systems in vehicles with
manual transmission, Ea sy tronic
  without air conditioning                        4.9        4.9        –         4. 9       5.3
  with air cond itioning                          4.9        4.9        –         4. 9       5.4
Cooling system in vehicles w ith
automatic transmission
  without air conditioning                        –          –          6.5       –          –
  with air cond itioning                          –          –          6.7       –          –
Fuel tank (nominal capa city )
  Corsa                                           45         45         45        45         45
  Combo                                           –          –          –         52         –

Engine oil with filter change                     3.0        3.5        3.5       3. 5       4.25
Engine oil betw een MIN a nd MAX
  on d ip stick                                   1.0        1.0        1.0       1. 0       1.0
Wind screen wash reserv oir                       2.2        2.2        2.2       2. 2       2.2

Headlight wash reservoir                          3.5        3.5        3.5       3. 5       3.5




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


254
Capacities (app rox . in litres)
Eng ine 1 )                                       Z 13 DT   Y 17 DTL   Z 17 DTH

Cooling systems in vehicles with
manual transmission, Ea sy tronic
  without air conditioning                        6.1       7.1        6. 1
  with air cond itioning                          6.1       7.1        6. 1
Cooling system in vehicles w ith
automatic transmission
  without air conditioning                        –         –          –
  with air cond itioning                          –         –          –
Fuel tank (nominal capa city )
  Corsa                                           45        45         45
  Combo                                           52        52         52

Engine oil with filter change                     3.2       4.5        5. 0
Engine oil betw een MIN a nd MAX
  on d ip stick                                   1.0       1.0        1. 0
Wind screen wash reserv oir                       2.2       2.2        2. 2

Headlight wash reservoir                          3.5       3.5        3. 5




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 234, 235.


                                                                                  255
Dimensions (mm)
                                               Corsa   Comb o

Length                                         3839    4322

Width                                          1646    1684
Width with two ex terior mirrors               1955    1892

Height                                         1440    1801
Loa d compartment length                       –       10201 )/1780 2)

Loa d compartment width                        –       11203 )/1300 4)
Wheelb ase                                     2491    2716

Turning c ircle diam eter 5 )                  10.45   11.25




1)
     Co mbi.
2)
     Co mbo .
3)
     Wid th b etw een th e wheel hou sin gs.
4)
     Maximum width.
5)
     In metres.


256
Mounting dim ens ions of
towing e quipme nt with
re movable coupling ball bar,
Corsa
All dimensions relate to trailer towing
equipm ent app rov ed b y Vauxhall.

Dimension          mm

A                  330.5
B                  649
C                  465
D                  430
E                  71.5
F                  81.5
G                  487.5
H                  470.5
I                  173
J                  485
K                  120


    We recom mend hav ing tow ing
    equipment retrofitted by a Vauxhall
    Authorised Repairer.




                                          257
Mounting dim ens ions of
trailer hitch with
rigid coupling ball bar,
Combo
All dimensions relate to trailer towing
equipm ent app rov ed b y Vauxhall.

Dimension          mm

A                  71
B                  929
C                  515
D                  506.3
E                  274.3
F                  149
G                  401.7
H                  384
I                  398


    We recom mend hav ing tow ing
    equipment retrofitted by a Vauxhall
    Authorised Repairer.




258
259
Index   A                                                                               B
                                                                                        Battery . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 139, 224, 253
        AB S (Anti-lock Brake System ) ..... .... ..... 158
                                                                                          Interruption of
        Ac cessories .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 93, 95, 98, 180
                                                                                          power supply . .... .... ..... .56, 104, 130, 137
        Ac cessory socket .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 75
                                                                                        Before starting off . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 22
        Aerial . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 48, 228
                                                                                        Belt tensioners ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 80
        Air intak e .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 124
                                                                                        Bleeding, diesel fuel sy stem ... .... ..... .... . 175
        Air recirculation system .. .... .... ..... . 114, 123
                                                                                        Bonnet .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 63
        Air vents .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 115
                                                                                        Brake assist .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157
        Airba gs . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 84
                                                                                        Brake system ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 156
        Ala rm .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 62
                                                                                        Brakes .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 156
        Alterna tor . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 31
                                                                                          ABS ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 158
        Anti-corrosion service ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 217
                                                                                          Brake assist .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157
        Antifreeze . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 220
                                                                                          Brake fluid . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 233
        Antifreeze protection . ..... .... .... ..... . 220, 224
                                                                                          Brake lights .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 208, 209
        Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel ... .... ..... .... ..... 142
                                                                                          Brake servo unit .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138
          O ctane number .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 234
                                                                                          Foot brak e ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157
        Anti-theft lock
                                                                                          Hand brak e ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 158
          Alloy wheels ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 187
                                                                                        Bulb replacem ent .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 200
        Anti-theft protection .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 23
                                                                                        Bulbs .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 98, 200
        Aq ua planing . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 163
        Ashtray .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 76
        Automatic anti-da zzle interior mirror .. .. 98
        Automatic tra nsmission .. .... .... ..... ... 21, 132
          C ontrol indicator .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 134
          Driving programm e ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 134
          Fault .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 136
          Interruption of power supply ... .... ..... 137
          K ic kdown .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 135
          Selector lever . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 21
          Winter programm e . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 134
        Automatic wiping ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 18




260
                                                                                  Control indica tor
C                                                                                                                                                             D
                                                                                    ABS (Anti-lock Brak e S ystem) .. .... ..... 159
Ca pacities .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .254, 255                 Airbag ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 89   Data . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 51, 232
Ca r Pass . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 4       Engine electronics .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 148                Date . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 39
Ca ra van/trailer tow ing .... ..... .... .... .138, 165                            Exhaust . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 147      Day tim e running lights .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 99
Ca re ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 227      Imm obiliser .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 51       Decommissioning .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 226
Ca ta lytic converter . ..... .... ..... 145, 149, 175                              TC (Traction C ontrol system) .. .... ..... 150                           Demisting a nd defrosting
Central locking system .... ..... .... .... ..... 52, 54                            Transm ission .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 134            Windows ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 117
Centre console lighting ... ..... .... .... ..... .... 101                        Control indica tors ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 12, 29              with climate control system .... ..... .... . 121
Changing the                                                                        Belt tensioners .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 81            With the air conditioning system .... . 118
 remote c ontrol battery .. ..... .... .... ... 53, 253                             EPS (Electric Power S teering) ... .... ..... .. 32                       Diesel fuel filter .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 220
Changing ty re/w heel ty pe ... .... .... ..... .... 160                            ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ... 151                                Diesel fuel system . .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 175, 220
Changing wheels .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 185                    Coolant . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 220   Dimensions ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 256
Child restraint system . .... ..... .... .... ..... 95, 98                        Coolant level .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 221       Dipped beam .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 15, 99
Child safety locks ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 50                Coolant temp erature d isplay . ..... .... ..... .. 36                        Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ... 200, 205, 207
Child safety seats ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 95                Coolant thermometer ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 36                  Display . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 37, 126, 132
Ciga rette lig hter . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..75             Correcting time .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 42        Display m ode .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 44
Clim ate control system ... ..... .... .... ..... .... 119                        Coupling sock et load . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 171                Door locks . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 50, 230
Clock .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 35   Courtesy light .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 101         Door-to-d oor light function .... .... ..... .... . 101
Clutch operation . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139                 Courtesy lights                                                             Driving ab road .. .... .... ..... .... ... 142, 214, 215
CO 2 em issions .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 237                 Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 212                  Head lig hts ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 102
Code numbers .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 4               Cruise control . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 153         Toll system s ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 49
Coin holder . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 77         Curtain airbags . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 87         Driving hints . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138
Cold start ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139
Contrast . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..43




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     261
                                                                                Exhaust gases ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 21, 148                  G
E
                                                                                Exhaust sy stem .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 148              Gears .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 20
Ea sy tronic .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 20, 126          Exterior mirrors .. ..... .... ..... .... .... .... 8, 97, 114                  Genuine Vaux hall
    Display .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 126
                                                                                F                                                                                Parts and Accessories .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 25
    Driv ing programmes ... ..... .... .... ..... .... 127
                                                                                                                                                                Glasses compartment .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 77
    fault .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 130   Fan .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 113, 217
                                                                                                                                                                Glove compartment .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 77
    Interrup tion of power sup ply ... ..... .... 130                           Fault .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 104
                                                                                                                                                                Graphical information disp lay ... ..... .... ... 37
    Kickdown .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 128          Filling station
                                                                                                                                                                Gross v ehicle weight . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 240
    Selector lever ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 20, 127                 C apacities .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 254, 255
                                                                                                                                                                Gross v ehicle weight rating .... .... ..... .... . 240
    Winter prog ra mme .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 128                      Engine oil lev el .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 218
Ec onomical driving . ..... .... ..... .... .... .138, 140                         Fuel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..142, 234, 235              H
Electric folding roof ..... .... ..... .... .... .107, 109                         Ignition key .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 4         Halogen headlight system ..... .... ..... .... . 200
Electric power steering .... ..... .... .... ... 32, 138                           O pening the bonnet .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 63                    Hand brake .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 23, 158
    Towing .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 178          Tyre pressure . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 249              Haz ard warning lights ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 17
Electric sun roof .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 106                Vehicle data .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 232, 233                  Head restraints . .... .... ..... .... ...28, 64, 65, 98
Electric windows . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 104                  Windscreen wa sh system .... ..... .... ..... 224                            Headlight flash . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 15
Electrical system . .... ..... .... ..... 194, 225, 253                         First-a id kit ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 98, 180          Headlight range adjustment . .... ..100, 200
Electronic components .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 225                       Flat ty re . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 190    Headlight switch ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 15, 99
Electronic immobiliser . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..51                   Fog lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 100        Headlight wash system . .... ..... .... .... 18, 224
Electronic Stability Program .... .... ..... .... 151                              Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 208                   Headlights .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 15
Ellipsoidal headlight sy stem .... .... ..... .... 205                          Fog tail lig ht .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 100           Daytime running lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ... 99
Engine code ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .234, 235                    Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 208                     Driv ing abroad .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 102
Engine control indicator .. ..... .... .... ..... .... 148                      Folding sun roof                                                                  Fog lights .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 100
Engine oil .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 218          Manual operation .. ..... .... .... ..... . 108, 110                           Reversing lig hts . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 100
Engine oil change ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 219                 Foot brake ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 157             Wa rning device . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 23
Engine oil consumption ... ..... 218, 234, 235                                  Front passenger a irba g .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 84                    Headlights
Engine oil filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 219           Fuel .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 142, 143, 234, 235                   Changing bulbs . .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 200, 205
Engine oil level .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 218            Fuel consumption ... .... ..... .... ..140, 142, 236                            Heated ex terior mirrors . .... ..... 19, 114, 121
Engine sp eed . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139            Fuel gauge ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 36         Heated front sea ts .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 115
Engine wash ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 230            Fuel level ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 36     Heated rear w indow . ..... .... ..... 19, 114, 121
Env ironmenta l protection .... .... .... .219, 227                             Fuel sy stem, diesel . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 175                Heating ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 112, 116
EPS . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ...32, 138     Fuses . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 194      Seats . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 115
ES P (Electronic S tability Program) ... .... 151
                                                                                                                                                                  with climate control system .... ..... .... . 120
Ex haust control indicator ..... .... .... ..... .... 147                                                                                                         with the air conditioning sy stem . .... . 112


262
H (continued)                                                                     K                                                                               L
Height adjustment                                                                 Key                                                                             Language selection .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 42
  seat belts .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 82            ignition loc k ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 22          Lashing eyes . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 69, 72
  Steering wheel .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 9                  Locking doors ..... .... ..... .... .... .... 50, 52, 54                      Leather trim .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 229
Horn ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 17     Remove . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 23         Light sw itch .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 15
I                                                                                   Starting . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 9, 22, 51            Lighting ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 15, 99
                                                                                  Key numbers .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 4            Driv ing abroad .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 102
Identification plate . ..... .... ..... .... .... .232, 233
                                                                                  Keys ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 4, 50   Load compa rtm ent grille .. ..... .... ..... .... ... 72
Ignition sy stem ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .217, 225
                                                                                                                                                                  Loading .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 74, 170, 240
Imm ob iliser .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 51
                                                                                                                                                                  Loading area
Information display ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 37
                                                                                                                                                                    loa ding .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 74
Infotainm ent system ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 37
                                                                                                                                                                  Loading the v ehicle .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 74
Inspection system ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 216
                                                                                                                                                                  Lock buttons . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 50
Instrument illum ination ... ..... .... .... ..... .... 101
                                                                                                                                                                  Locking doors .... .... .... ..... .... ..... 4, 50, 52, 54
   Bulb replacement .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 213
                                                                                                                                                                  Locking from the inside . .... ..... .... ..... . 50, 54
Instrument panel .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 10
                                                                                                                                                                  Locks .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 230
Instruments .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .10, 29, 34, 35
                                                                                                                                                                  Lubricants . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..218, 233
Interior mirror . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 7, 98
                                                                                                                                                                  Luggage compartment . .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 57
Interruption of power supply
                                                                                                                                                                    Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 212
   Easytronic ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 130
                                                                                                                                                                    Cover ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 70
   Elec tric sun roof .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 107
                                                                                                                                                                    Extension ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 66, 68
   Elec tric wind ow s . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 104
                                                                                                                                                                    Lashing ey es .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 69
   Elec tronic S ta bility Program .... .152, 225
                                                                                                                                                                    Lighting . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 102
   folding sun roof .. ..... .... ..... .... .... .108, 110
                                                                                                                                                                    Loading . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 74, 170, 240
   Selector lever lock .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 137
                                                                                                                                                                    Locking . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 57
ISO -FIX ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 95
                                                                                                                                                                  Luggage compartment cover .... ..... .... ... 70
J
Jac k ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .184, 187
Jump leads . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 176




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       263
M                                                                               P                                                                               R
                                                                                Pa intwork damage .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 229
M+S tyres .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 164                                                                                        Rad io .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 48
                                                                                Pa rk ing distance sensor ... .... .... ..... .... ..... 155
Main beam . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 15, 99                                                                                             Rad io equipment (CB) ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 49
                                                                                Pa rk ing .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 23, 155
  Bulb replacement .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 202                                                                                                     Rad io remote control ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 52
                                                                                Pa rk ing lights . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 15
  Control indicator . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 31                                                                                               Rain sensor ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 18, 222, 228
                                                                                  Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 203
Maintenance .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 24, 216                                                                                                Reading lights ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 102
                                                                                Pa rk ing the vehicle . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 23
  Air c onditioning sy stem ... .... .... ..... .... 125                                                                                                        Rear light cluster ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 99
                                                                                Pa rts .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 25, 98
  Antifreeze protection .. ..... .... .... ..... .... 220                                                                                                         Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 208, 209
                                                                                Pedals ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 139
  Bra kes . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 156                                                                                      Rear seat b ackrests .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 66, 68
                                                                                Perform ance .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 236
  Catalytic conv erter .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 149                                                                                                   Rear window wash system ..... 18, 224, 228
                                                                                Petrol . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..142, 234, 235
  Engine oil .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .218, 219                                                                                               Refuelling .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 143
                                                                                Pinking .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 142
  Fuel consumption .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 141                                                                                                       Fuel filler cap . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 144
                                                                                Pollen filter ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 124
  Ty re pressure .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 161                                                                                              Relays ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 194
                                                                                Preheating ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 22, 31
  Ty res ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 162                                                                                     Remote control
                                                                                Preheating switch ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 22
  Windscreen wipers ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 222                                                                                                       Central lock ing sy stem ... ..... .... ..... .... ... 52
                                                                                Pushing, towing . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 175
Mirrors .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 7, 97                                                                                     Replacement keys . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 50
Misted w indows .. .... ..... .... ..... 117, 118, 121                                                                                                          Reversing lights . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 100
Mobile telephone ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 49                                                                                                  Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 208, 209
                                                                                                                                                                Roof load .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .74, 138, 141, 240
N
                                                                                                                                                                Roof rack .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 141, 165
Numb er plate lighting and                                                                                                                                      Roof racks . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..141, 165
  Bulb replacement .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 210                                                                                                     Running-in .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138
O                                                                                                                                                                 Brakes ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 156

O ctane numbers . .... ..... .... ..... 142, 234, 235
O dometer ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 34
O il chang e .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 219
O il consumption . .... ..... .... ..... 218, 234, 235
O il filter change .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 219
O il level ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 218
O perating temperature .. ..... .... .... ..... .... 139
O peration of the system . ..... .... .... ..... .... 117
O utside temperature ga uge ... .... ..... .... .. 38
O verrun .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .139, 141


264
                                                                                   Side airbags ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 86           Toll systems .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 49
S
                                                                                   Signal system . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .15, 17                Tools . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 184
Safeguard against                                                                  Sliding doors .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 56           Towing . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 178
 unauthorised use .. ..... .... ... 4, 9, 24, 50, 51                               Spare keys ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 50           Towing equipment .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 165
Safety ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 78      Spare wheel ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 182, 185                  Towing eye ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 178, 180
Safety acc essories .. ..... .... ..... .... .95, 98, 180                          Speed .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 140, 141            Traction Control sy stem .... ..... .... ..... .... . 150
Safety net ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 71            Fuel consum ption ... ..... .... .... ..... . 140, 141                         Transm ission, automatic ... ..... .... .... 21, 132
Safety systems .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 78               Speedometer . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 34                 Display .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 132
Sav ing energ y ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 140               Starting the engine .... ..... .... .... .... 9, 51, 175                             Driv ing programme ... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 134
Seat belts ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .79, 82, 230                     Self-help ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 175              Fault . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 136
Seat height a djustment .. ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 6                       Steering colum n lock .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 9, 23                        Interruption of p ow er supply .. ..... .... . 137
Seat occupancy recognition .... .... ..... .... .. 89                              Steering wheel adjustm ent . .... ..... .... ..... .... 9                            Kickd ow n .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 135
Seats .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 5   Steering wheel rem ote control .... .... ..... .. 26                                 Selector lev er . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 21, 133
  Extending the luggage compa rtm ent 66                                           Stowage compartments . .... .... ..... .... .73, 77                                  Selector lev er lock . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 21
  heated .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 115            Sun roof . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 105, 106               Winter programme .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 134
Selector lever lock ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 21, 133                        fault ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 107      Transm ission, Easytronic ... ..... .... ..... .... . 126
Self-diagnosis ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .81, 89, 151                       Sun shade . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 105, 106                   Driv ing programmes .. .... ..... .... ..... .... . 127
Self-diagnostics .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 159                 Sun visors .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 77           fault .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 130
Self-help . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 175         System setting s . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 41                 Interruption of p ow er supply .. ..... .... . 130
  Automatic transmission ... .... .... ..... .... 136                                                                                                                   Kickd ow n .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 128
  Elec tric wind ow s . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 103                  T
                                                                                                                                                                        Selector lev er . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 20, 127
  Folding sun roof .. ..... .... ..... .... .... .108, 110                         Ta chom eter ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 34              Winter programme .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 128
  Information display . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..39                       Ta il lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 99      Trea d depth . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 162
  Radio rem ote control .. ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 52                          Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... . 208, 209                          Trip comp uter .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 27, 44
Service Booklet ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 24               Ta ilg ate . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 57    Trip odometer ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 35
Service interval display ... ..... .... .... ... 28, 216                           Ta nk                                                                             Triple information display . ..... .... ..... .... ... 37
Service work ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 24, 216                   Fuel gauge . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 36             Turn signal lig hts ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 16
                                                                                   TC (Traction Control System ) . ..... .... ..... 150                              Turn signals
                                                                                   Technical data .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 232                    Bulb replacement .. ..... .... . 204, 206 - 209
                                                                                   Temperature regula tion . .... .... ..... .... ..... 113                          Tyre chains ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 164
                                                                                   Temporary spa re wheel .. .... .... ..... . 164, 183                              Tyre condition ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 162
                                                                                   The first 600 miles/1000 km .... ..... .... ..... 138                             Tyre pressure ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 161, 249
                                                                                   Tig htening torque .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . 189, 249                       Tyre rep air kit .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 190
                                                                                   Tim e .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 39


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            265
U                                                                            W                                                                            X
Units of m easure .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 43                                                                                        Xenon head lig ht system
                                                                             Warning buzzers .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 23
Unlead ed fuel ..... .... ..... . 142, 145, 234, 235                                                                                                        Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 207
                                                                             Warning triangle .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 98, 180
Used oil .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 219   Wash fluid reserv oir,
V                                                                             windsc reen w ash system .. .... ..... .... ..... 224
                                                                             Weights . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 240
Valve cap key ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 161
                                                                             Wheels ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 160
Vauxhall alarm system ... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 60
                                                                             Wheels, tyres . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 160
Vauxhall Service . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ...24, 214
                                                                             Windows ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 103
Vehicle care ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 227
                                                                               Demisting and defrosting .117, 118, 121
Vehicle decomm issioning .... .... .... ..... .... 226
                                                                             Windscreen wash sy stem ... .... ..... ... 18, 224
Vehicle identification number . .... ..... .... 233
                                                                               Antifreeze protection .. .... .... ..... .... ..... 224
Vehicle recommissioning ..... .... .... ..... .... 226
                                                                               C apacities .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 254, 255
Ventilation . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... 112, 116, 122
                                                                               Wash fluid reservoir .... .... .... ..... .... ..... 224
                                                                             Windscreen wipers . .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 17, 222
                                                                             Winter mode
                                                                               Starting-off aid ... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 128, 134
                                                                             Winter op eration
                                                                               Battery ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 139
                                                                               C oolant, a ntifreeze ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 220
                                                                               Fuel consum ption ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 141
                                                                               Fuel for diesel engines .... .... ..... .... ..... 143
                                                                               Heating . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 112
                                                                               Locks . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 230
                                                                               Tyre chains . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 164
                                                                               Window demisting
                                                                               and d efrosting .... .... ..... .... ..117, 118, 121
                                                                               Windscreen wa sh system,
                                                                               antifreeze p rotection .. .... .... ..... .... ..... 224
                                                                             Winter prog ra mme .... ..... .... .... ..... . 128, 134
                                                                             Winter tyres ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 164, 249




266
267

								
To top